MGCplus AB22A/AB32

Transcription

MGCplus AB22A/AB32

Operating Manual
Amplifier system
MGCplus
with display and control panel
AB22A/AB32
B0534-18.0 en
sdjki
3
Contents
A Introduction
1
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
2
Notes on the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
3
System description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-10
4
MGCplus housing versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-13
5
Structure of the MGCplus device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-15
6
Insert communications processor CP22/CP42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-17
7
Modules in the MGCsplit system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-20
7.1
Measurement module, enclosure 1−SH400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-21
7.2
Measurement module, enclosure 1−SH650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-22
7.3
Processor modules 1−SH400CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-23
7.4
LED display for modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-24
7.5
Connecting to MGCplus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-27
7.6
Enclosure dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-32
8
Conditions on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-35
9
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-36
MGCplus with AB22A/AB32
4
B Connecting
1
Connection: desktop housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
1.1
Mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
1.2
Battery connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-4
1.3
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-6
2
Connecting the ABX22A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-8
3
Shielding design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-11
4
Connecting transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-12
4.1
Connecting separate TEDS modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-13
4.2
Strain gage full bridges, inductive full bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-14
4.3
SG full bridges with AP810/AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-15
4.4
Strain gage half bridges, inductive half bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-16
4.5
LVDT-Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-17
4.6
SG half bridges with AP810/AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-18
4.7
Connecting a single strain gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-19
4.7.1
Compensating resistor external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-19
4.7.2
Compensating resistor external with AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-20
4.7.3
Single strain gage with AP14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-21
4.7.4
Single strain gage with AP814Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-22
4.7.5
Single strain gage with AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-23
4.7.6
SG systems and rosettes on AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-24
Torque flange T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-26
4.8.1
Torque measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-26
AP460i Pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-28
4.8
5
Rotation speed measurement (symmetrical signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.3
B-29
Rotation speed measurement (symmetrical signals) with reference signal . . . . . . . .
B-31
Torque transducers (T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-33
4.9.1
Torque measurement (square-wave excitation voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-33
4.9.2
Rotation speed measurement (asymmetrical signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-35
Torque transducers (T1A, T4A/WA-S3, T5, TB1A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-37
4.10.1 Torque measurement (slip ring or direct cable connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-37
4.10.2 Rotation speed and angle of rotation measurement (T4WA-S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-38
4.10.3 Rotation speed measurement with inductive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-41
4.11
Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-42
4.12
DC voltage sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-44
4.13
DC power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-48
4.14
Resistors, Pt10, 100, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-49
4.15
Frequency measurement without a direction of rotation signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-51
4.16
Frequency measurement with direction of rotation signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-52
4.17
Impulse counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-53
4.18
Active and passive piezoelectric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-55
4.19
Piezoresistive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-56
4.20
Potentiometric transducers (single−channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-57
4.21
Potentiometric transducers (Multi−channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-58
4.22
Connection via distributor board VT814i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-59
4.23
Connection via distributor board VT810/815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-60
Connecting the MGCsplit modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-62
4.9
4.10
5
4.8.2
5.1
Split-line-cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-62
5.2
Power supply units NT650/NT651 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-63
5.3
Amplifier modules and connection boards in the 1−SH400 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-73
5.3.1
Amplifier modules that can be connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-73
5.3.2
Connection boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-74
6
5.4
6
Connecting the MGCsplit modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-75
5.5
Inputs/outputs for measurement modules SH400/SH650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-76
5.6
AP409 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-77
5.7
AP401 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-78
5.8
AP815i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-79
5.9
AP460i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-80
5.10
AP13i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-81
5.11
AP17 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-85
5.12
B-89
5.13
B-90
5.14
B-93
Connecting CANHEAD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-96
6.1
ML74 communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-97
6.2
AP74 connection board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-98
7
Connecting the computer, PLC and printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-99
8
Connecting a shunt resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-100
9
Inputs, Outputs and remotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-101
9.1
Inputs and Outputs CP22/CP42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-101
9.2
Analogue output on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-104
9.3
Connection boards AP01i...AP18i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-105
9.3.1
Pin assignment AP01i/03i/05/08/09/11i/14/17/18i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-106
AP02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-111
AP07/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-113
AP13i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-116
AP77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-119
7
9.3.2
Installing the EM001 final stage module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-120
AP07/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-121
AP08/14/17/18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-122
AP09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-124
C Commissioning
1
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
Devices in the desktop housing and rack frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
C-4
D Functions and symbols on the AB22A/AB32
1
2
3
Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-3
1.1
AB22A control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-3
1.2
AB32 control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-4
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-5
2.1
The first display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-5
2.2
Display in measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-6
2.3
Messages on the AB22A/AB32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-10
AB22A/AB32 in set-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-11
3.1
Calling up menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-13
3.2
Quitting menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-14
3.3
Channel selection in measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-15
3.4
Channel selection in set-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-16
8
3.5
Saving the set-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-17
3.6
Selection menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-18
3.7
Elements in the set-up window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-19
E Measure
1
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-3
2
Basic measurement channel set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-4
2.1
3
Adaptation to the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-6
2.1.1
Extended functions of the ML38B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-7
2.2
TEDS transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-9
2.3
Signal conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-13
2.4
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-16
2.5
Analogue outputs (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-17
Adaptation to the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-20
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
SG transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-20
3.1.1
Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-21
3.1.2
Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-24
Strain gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-27
3.2.1
E-29
Inductive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-31
3.3.1
E-32
3.3.2
Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-34
Torque transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-37
3.4.1
Direct input of torque characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-39
3.4.2
Measuring with the built-in shunt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-41
9
3.5
Adapting the rotation-speed channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-45
Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-49
3.6.1
E-50
Current and voltage measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-52
3.7.1
E-53
Resistance temperature detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-55
3.8.1
E-56
Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-58
3.9.1
E-59
Impulse counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-61
3.10.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-62
Piezoelectric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-66
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
4
4.1
Connecting and measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-68
4.1.1
E-70
4.1.2
Setting up the zero point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-72
4.1.3
Special case: initial charge is known . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-73
Drift balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-74
Current-fed piezoelectric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-75
4.2
5
5.1
6
Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-76
Piezoresistive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-78
6.1
7
E-79
6.1.1
Measuring transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-81
Potentiometric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-83
7.1
E-84
7.1.1
E-86
Measuring transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
F Additional functions
1
2
Remote (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-3
1.1
Switching on remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-3
1.2
Assigning remote contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-4
Limit switches (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
2.1
Activate limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-7
2.2
Setting up limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-8
2.3
Selection keys in the menu Limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-11
3
Combine limit switches (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-12
4
Adjusting peak values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-15
4.1
Peak value stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-15
4.2
Combine peak value stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-16
4.3
Controlling the peak value store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-18
4.4
”Peak value” operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-19
4.5
”Current value” operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-20
4.6
”Envelope curve” operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-21
4.7
Clear peak value store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-22
5
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-23
6
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-24
11
G Display
1
2
3
Display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-3
1.1
Select set-up window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-4
1.2
Set-up window Display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-5
1.3
Set-up window components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-6
1.3.1
Numerical display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-7
1.3.2
Graphic display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-17
1.4
Status limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-21
1.5
Status data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-22
F-keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-23
2.1
F-keys in measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-23
2.2
F-keys in set-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-26
Channel names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-27
H System
1
2
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-3
1.1
Define new user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-4
1.2
Enable password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-5
1.3
Set operator access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-6
1.4
Delete user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-7
1.5
Change password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-8
Save/Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-9
12
3
Recording measurement series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
H-14
Setting the measurement series parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-15
4
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-32
5
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-37
6
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-38
7
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-39
I
Menu structure
J
Specifications
1
Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-3
1.1
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-3
1.2
Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML01B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-5
1.3
J-8
1.4
J-11
1.5
J-13
1.6
J-15
1.7
J-17
1.8
J-19
1.9
Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML55BS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-21
1.10
J-24
13
2
Connection boards for one-channel amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-26
3
Multi-channel amplifier module ML455 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-34
4
Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-36
5
Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML801B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-41
Multi−channel amplifier connection boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-51
Multi−channel amplifier connection boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-52
6
Programmable plug−in module ML70B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-53
7
Communication module ML71B/ML71BS6 with AP71 (CANbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-56
8
Communication module ML74 with AP74 (CANHEAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-58
9
Communication module ML77B with AP77 (Profibus DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-59
10 Multi-channel I/O amplifier module ML78B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-60
11 System devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-63
K Index
14
A-1
A
Introduction
A-2
Introduction Ý Safety instructions
1
A-3
Safety instructions
Use in accordance with the regulations
The amplifier system is to be used exclusively for measurement tasks and directly related control tasks. Use for any
purpose other than the above shall be deemed to be not in accordance with the regulations.
To ensure safe operation, the device may only be operated in accordance with the information given in the Operating Manual. It is also essential to comply with the legal and safety requirements for the application concerned during use. The same applies to the use of accessories.
General dangers due to non-observance of the safety instructions
The amplifier system is a state-of−the-art device and is fail-safe. The device may give rise to further dangers if it is
inappropriately installed and operated by untrained personnel.
Any person instructed to carry out installation, commissioning, maintenance or repair of the device must have read
and understood the Operating Manual and in particular the technical safety instructions.
Remaining dangers
The scope of supply and list of components provided with the amplifier system cover only part of the scope of measurement technique. In addition, equipment planners, installers and operators should plan, implement and respond
to the safety engineering considerations of measurement technique in such a way as to minimise remaining dangers. Prevailing regulations must be complied with at all times. There must be reference to the remaining dangers
connected with measurement technique.
After setting up and password protected activities, care must be taken to ensure that any control units that may be
connected remain in a safe and secure state until the switching behaviour of the amplifier system has been
checked.
A-4
Any risk of remaining dangers when working with the amplifier system is pointed out in this introduction by means
of the following symbols:
Symbol:
DANGER
Meaning:
Maximum danger level
Warns of a decidedly dangerous situation in which failure to comply with safety requirements will lead to death or
serious physical injury.
Symbol:
WARNING
Meaning:
Dangerous situation
Warns of a potentially dangerous situation in which failure to comply with safety requirements can lead to death or
serious physical injury.
Symbol:
CAUTION
Meaning:
Possibly dangerous situation
Warns of a possibly dangerous situation in which failure to comply with safety requirements could cause damage
to property or result in some kind of minor physical injury.
A-5
Symbols indicating application notes and useful information:
Symbol:
NOTE
Means that important information about the product or its handling is being given.
Symbol:
Meaning: CE mark
The CE mark enables the manufacturer to guarantee that the product complies with the requirements of the relevant EC directives (the declaration of conformity is available at http://www.hbm.com/support/dokumentation).
Symbol:
Meaning: Component may be damaged by electrostatic discharge
This means that the PCMCIA hard disk (optional) must be protected against static discharges by securing it in
place with the fasteners provided (CP42 only).
A-6
Working safely
Error messages must only be acknowledged when the cause of the error has been removed and no further danger
exists.
Conversions and modifications
The amplifier system must not be modified from the design or safety engineering point of view except with our express agreement. Any modification shall exclude all liability on our part for any resulting damage.
In particular, any repair or soldering work on motherboards is prohibited (this includes changing components other
than EPROMs). When exchanging complete modules, use only original parts from HBM.
Qualified personnel
means persons entrusted with the installation, assembly, commissioning and operation of the product who possess
the appropriate qualifications for their function.
This instrument must only to be installed and used by qualified personnel, strictly in accordance with the technical
data and the safety requirements and regulations listed below. It is also essential to comply with the legal and
safety requirements for the application concerned during use. The same applies to the use of accessories.
A-7
Safety requirements
Before commissioning, find out whether the mains voltage and current type specified on the identification plate
match the mains voltage and current type at the place of use, and whether the circuit being used is adequately protected.
Insert the mains plug only into a socket with a protection switch (Protection Class I). When connecting electrical
devices to low voltage: connect to separated extra−low voltage (SELV) only (safety transformer in accordance with
DINVDE 0551 / EN60742).
Use only the mains cable supplied, which has been provided with a ferrite core.
Before you open the device, make sure it is switched off; remove the mains plug from the socket.
Never pull the mains plug from the socket by the mains cable.
Do not operate the device, if the mains cable is damaged.
If an amplifier channel is to be withdrawn, close off the plug-in unit with a blank plate.
Built-in devices must only ever be operated whilst they are within the housing provided for them.
The device complies with the safety requirements of DIN EN 61010-Part 1 (VDE 0411-Part 1); Protection Class I.
To ensure adequate immunity from interference, use only Greenline shielded ducting (see HBM offprint ”Greenline
shielding design, EMC-compliant measuring cable; G36.35.0”)
The port connections (50V) must have an insulating strength of at least 350V(AC).
A-8
2
Introduction Ý Notes on the documentation
Notes on the documentation
The total documentation for the MGCplus amplifier system covers the following publications:
The Operating Manual
explains how you can operate the device manually and use it to take measurements.
With each system device delivered, CD-ROMs containing the following documentation are also supplied:
Operation with computer or terminal
contains the commands for programming and measuring with a computer or terminal
MGCplus Assistant,
documentation about the program for assigning parameters and driving the MGCplus measurement amplifier
system.
Catman Demo,
which is a demo version of the data acquisition, display and analysis software from HBM.
A-9
Introduction Ý Notes on the documentation
This manual contains all the information you need to operate the MGCplus.
There are several guidelines available to you:
•
The column header tells you which chapter or sub-section you are currently reading.
Example:
Connections SG full bridges, induct. half bridges
B-15
•
The page numbering is linked to capital letters which correspond to the chapter headings.
•
Chapter D Functions and symbols on the AB22A/AB32 contains explanations about the AB22A/AB32 display
and control panel. All statements about the display and control panel refer to both variants (AB22A/AB32). For
reasons of space, however, most of the illustrations only show the AB22A.
•
Chapter I Menu structure gives you an overview of the selection and set-up menus on the display and control
panel.
A-10
3
Introduction Ý System description
System description
The MGCplus system is modular in construction. Depending on the enclosure variant concerned, up to 16 slots are
available for one-channel and multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules. This means that up to 128 measuring points
can be measured in one MGCplus.
Each amplifier plug-in module operates in standalone mode through the internal CPU. Data conditioning, such as
taring, filtering and measuring range adjustment, is carried out in digital form. The disadvantages of analogue conditioning, such as time and temperature related drift, errors due to component tolerances, limited flexibility and high
circuit complexity, can no longer arise. The prerequisite for this, however, is analogue-digital conversion free of information loss. The digitally conditioned signal is fed to the internal high-speed bus.
In the case of one-channel measurement modules, two analogue outputs (voltage or current) are available in addition to the digital measured values.
A credit-card format standard internal PC collects the data with a total sampling rate of up to 300 000 values per
second. All measurement signals can be captured in parallel, since each channel has its own A/D converter. No
Sample & Hold or multiplexer is used in the MGCplus. This ensures continuous digital filtering and highest possible
signal stability.
Using interfaces like Ethernet or USB, data is sent to an external computer or PLC.
A-11
2
Further MGCplus
PC-Interface
PC-Card (optional)
Profibus
CAN
10V
...
1
Digit remote contacts, limit
switches
8
2400Hz
Digital
signal conditioning
filtering, scaling, zero
balancing, etc.
Digital
signal
conditioning
...
...
filtering
scaling, zero
balancing,
etc.
CPU
8-channel
module
CPU
...
CPU
Display
and
Communikation
processor CPxx
control
panel
Synchronisation
2400Hz
2400Hz
...
CPU
One−channel
module
Serial bus
MGCplus
Fig.3.1:
MGCplus block diagram
Fig.3.2:
ON/Off
MGCsplit block diagram
Embedded
PC with
memory
Multi-channel module
Bus communication
Display
PC Card
Communication
Power pack
On-board network
9V ... 58V
Digital signal
conditioning
Filtering
Scaling
Zero balance
Single-channel module
Dig. sign.
Filter.
Scal.
Zero
ML70B
Programmable module
10V
Digital I/O
CAN
RS 232 C/RS 485
10V
Remote contacts
Limit value switches
Ethernet
USB
RS 232 C
Hard disk
A-12
A-13
Introduction Ý MGCplus housing versions
4
MGCplus housing versions
The MGCplus system is supplied in various housing versions (dimensions in mm).
Desktop housing TG 009C (173x171x367)
Desktop housing TG 001C/002C (255x171x367)
Rack frame 19” ER 003C/004C (482x133x375)
Desktop housing TG 010B/003C/004C (458x171x367)
Desktop housing
Rack frame
Slots
Supply voltage
(V)
Weight, approx. (kg)
TG/ER
TG001C
−
6
230 (115)
6
TG010C
−
6 (with AB32)
230 (115)
8
TG002C
−
6
12/24 =
6
TG003C
ER003C
16
230 (115)
7/6
TG004C
ER004C
16
12/24 =
7.5/6
TG009C
−
2
230 (115)
5
A-14
Introduction Ý MGCplus housing versions
All basic versions of the device consist of the following components:
Display and control panel AB22A /AB32, AB12 (without link feature)
Amplifier plug-in modules (ML10B, ML30B, ML50B, ML55B, etc.)
Housing
Connection boards (AP01i, AP02, etc.)
Power pack
Options:
Final stage module (EM001)
Relay module (RM001)
CP22 (communications processor with Ethernet-on-board and USB-Interfaces)
CP42 (communications processor with data storage option)
A-15
Introduction Ý MGCplus device
5
Structure of the MGCplus device
Connection boards
(AP01i, AP02, etc.)
Final stage
modules
Power
pack
CPxx
Communications
processor
AB22A
display and
control panel
Amplifier plug-in modules
(ML30B, ML50B etc.)
Fig.5.1:
Device structure with display and control panel AB22A
A-16
Introduction Ý MGCplus device
Connection board
(AP01i to AP18i)
Final stage
modules
Power
pack
CPxx
Communications
processor
AB32 display and control panel
Amplifier plug-in modules
(ML30B, ML50B etc.)
Fig.5.2:
Device structure with display and control panel AB32
A-17
Introduction Ý MGCplus structure
6
Insert communications processor CP22/CP42
Requirements for operation of the communications processor:
The MGC/MGCplus system must not include any AB12 display and control panel.
The MGC/MGCplus/MGCsplit system must not include any modules of type MCxx. Only modules of type
MLxxB (with ML firmware or MC firmware) and MLxx (only with ML firmware) are permissible.
The display and control panels (AB22A, ABX22A, AB32) operated with the CP22 in the system unit must use
firmware P4.01 or higher. Any firmware upload has to be performed before installing the communication
processor.
A-18
If you want to swap out an older type of communications processor for a CP22/CP42 communication processor,
you have to remove two guide rails from the MGCplus housing.
Upper
Lower
guide rail
guide rail
Fig.6: Guide rails in the MGCplus housing
1.
Disconnect the MGCplus device from the mains power supply.
2.
Remove the upper and lower covers from the housing.
3.
Withdraw the existing communications processor from the housing.
4.
CP12 only: Remove the BL01 blank plate next to the power pack (see page A-19).
5.
Remove the upper and lower guide rails.
6.
Slide the new communications processor into the housing.
7.
Put the upper and lower covers back onto the housing.
A-19
CAUTION
Before swapping a CP12 communication processor for a CP22/CP42 you should also remove the blank
plate next to the power pack, in order to prevent damage to any PCB components when sliding the
processor into the housing.
Blank plate BL01
Power
pack
CP 12
AB22A
display and
control panel
Fig.6.1:
Removing the BL01 blank plate (view from above)
A-20
Introduction Ý MGCsplit
7
Modules in the MGCsplit system
The MGCsplit system is based on the components of the MGCplus measurement system and housed in robust
enclosures (protection class IP 40 or IP 65). The system makes it possible to build up a decentralized
measurement system from individual modules. Each enclosure has room for an amplifier module and a maximum
of two connector plates. The following module types are available, depending on the particular function required:
D
Measurement modules with one MLxx amplifier module and max. two connector plates
D
Processor modules with one communication processor
D Power pack module with power pack and CAN input
The modules are networked together using split-line connection cable and optionally may also be networked with
the MGCplus system via the AP20 connector plate.
Fig.7.1:
MGCsplit measuring amplifier system
Note
When the line length exceeds 10m or the total number of modules exceeds 8, we recommend the use of a
Link terminating resistor (1−MGCsplit Term) for linking the MGCsplit modules.
MGCplus with AB22A /AB32
A-21
7.1
Measurement module, enclosure 1−SH400
This module has an enclosure which is open at the front and in which a conventional MGCplus MLxx amplifier
module and a maximum of two connector plates can be fitted. If you use one connector plate only, this must be
positioned in the outermost slot on the right and the empty slot must be closed off with a blank plate.
Three communications LEDs
Four module address LEDs
Split-line in
Split-line out
Amplifier module, e.g. ML801B
Connector plate 2, e.g. AP409
Subchannels 5 to 8
Connector plate 1, e.g. AP409
Subchannels 1 to 4
Fig.7.2:
Version IP40, typical configuration
A-22
7.2
Measurement module, enclosure 1−SH650
This module is closed by a shared front panel. The MLxx amplifier module and a maximum of two connector plates
are fitted securely in the enclosure. The protection class IP65 enclosure is designed for outside use. The amplifier
module or connector plates can only be changed in the factory.
Four module address LEDs
Split-line in
Split-line out
Amplifier, e.g. ML801B
Connection sockets (ODU)
Channels 5 to 8
Connection sockets (ODU)
Channels 1 to 4
Fig.7.3:
Version IP65, typical configuration
A-23
7.3
Processor modules 1−SH400CP
The CP22 and CP42 communication processors in the 1−SH400 enclosure handle the communication between
modules. They have the usual PC interfaces (RS232, USB, Ethernet) and ensure rapid synchronization with other
MGCplus systems. The CP42 communication processor can also accept a PC card which enables data to be
recorded without a PC.
NOTE
The CP22 communication processor has to be mounted right−aligned and the middle (free) slot has to be
covered by a dummy plate.
Interfaces
Connection for indicator
PC card
Split-line in
Split-line out
Fig.7.4:
Synchronization
Enclosure 1−SH400 with CP42 communication processor
A-24
7.4
LED display for modules
Rx/Tx
For monitoring the communication bus.
Green = OK
Off = communication signal fault
SYNC
For monitoring the synchronization signal.
Green = signal present
Off = no signal present
LINK
For monitoring the measurement data bus.
Green = OK
Off = link signal fault
If the measurement system consists of more than four modules, the LINK LED is darker due
to the increased data load from all the modules. If a link signal fault is suspected, the
modules should be tested individually.
ERROR
If a measurement module is removed while the system is operating, the series-connected
module detects this and its ERROR LED flashes red at approx. 1 Hz.
Once the system is restarted the error status is reset.
A-25
Display for other error situations (measurement modules only):
LED display
Error
Error + address LED1
Restart error
No address received
Faulty address signal
More than 16 channels present
Restart errors can occur if the supply voltage is quickly turned off and on again.
After switching off the supply voltage it is best to wait about 2 seconds before turning it on
again.
”No address received” is displayed if the cabling is faulty, e.g. if line in (IN) and line out
(OUT) have become switched.
To remedy this, reconnect the cabling correctly and restart the system.
When more than 16 measurement modules are connected, the measurement module
displays at address 16 the error ”More than 16 channels present” and the following modules
show ”No address received”. These measurement modules are ignored by the
communication processor.
A-26
ADDRESS (measurement modules only)
Module address, binary display (address 16 = all LEDs off).
NOTE
The address is displayed in error-free measuring mode only. In the event of an
error the address LEDs have a different meaning (see ERROR).
Address
LED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
4
8
= LED on
= LED off
The module addresses result from the cabling of the measurement system. The
measurement module which has its split-line input (IN) connected to the split-line output
(OUT) on the processor module receives address 1. The next module, which is connected to
the output (OUT) of module 1, receives address 2, and so on. This gives continuous address
numbering without gaps.
In the event that MGCsplit modules are incorporated into an MGCplus system via the AP20
connector plate, the first MGCsplit measurement module receives the address of the AP20
slot (e.g. with an AP20 in slots 3 and 4, the measurement module receives address 3).
A-27
7.5
Connecting to MGCplus systems
Split-line connecting cable can also be used to connect the 1−SH400 and 1−SH650 measurement modules to
MGCplus systems. An AP20 connector plate is needed for this. A processor module is not necessary, since
communication is carried out by the processor on the MGCplus system.
MGCplus system
Connector plate
Connecting cable
AP20
1−Kab265
MGCsplit system
1−Kab264−3
Fig.7.5:
MGCsplit measurement module connected to an MGCplus system
MGCplus system requirements:
D
CP22 or CP42 communication processor.
D
Hardware version 1.31 (or higher) of the MGCplus measuring amplifier (older MLxx amplifiers can be retrofitted
in the factory at Darmstadt).
A-28
Installing an AP20 connector plate
The AP20 connector plate is installed in the MGCplus instrument directly alongside the existing connector plates.
The remaining slots (to the right of the AP20 in Fig.7.6) must be kept free. The unoccupied channels in the
MGCplus (up to channel 16) are available to the MGCsplit system.
In the case of amplifier modules that do not need connector plates (e.g. the ML77B), the backing connector plate
slot must be kept free just the same (see Fig.7.7).
MGCsplit
Addresses 1 to 4
Address 5
Address 6
AP20
MGCsplit
APxx
APxx
APxx
APxx
MGCplus
CP22/
CP42
IN
IN
OUT
Not in use
MLxx
MLxx
MLxx
MLxx
AB22A
display and
control panel
Fig.7.6:
MGCsplit measurement module connected to an MGCplus system via an AP20 connector plate (top view)
A-29
MGCsplit
MGCsplit
Address 5
Address 6
CP22/
Not in use
APxx
APxx
APxx
AP20
MGCplus
Addresses 1 to 4
CP42
IN
IN
OUT
Not in use
MLxx
MLxx
MLxx
ML77B
AB22A
display and
control panel
Fig.7.7:
AP20 next to an amplifier module without a connector plate (top view)
A-30
Is the last MGCplus module (MLxx or APxx) is double-width (e.g. ML38B, AP03i, etc.), then a complete slot must
be kept free ahead of the AP20 connector plate (see Fig.7.8 and Fig.7.9).
MGCsplit
MGCsplit
Addresses 1 to 4
Address 6
Address 7
Not in use
APxx
APxx
APxx
APxx
AP20
MGCplus
CP22/
CP42
Not in use
Fig.7.8:
ML38B
MLxx
MLxx
MLxx
AB22A
display and
control panel
Special case of an ML38B with an AP20 connector plate
IN
OUT
IN
A-31
MGCsplit
Address 8
AP20
AP03i
MGCsplit
Address 7
APxx
APxx
APxx
MGCplus
Addresses 1 to 4
CP22/
CP42
Not in use
Not in use
OUT
IN
MLxx
MLxx
MLxx
MLxx
AB22A
display and
control panel
IN
Fig.7.9:
Special case of a double-width connector plate next to an AP20 connector plate
A-32
7.6
Enclosure dimensions
Mechanical linkage of the module enclosure
205.5
202.42
204.4
149.4
Raster 101.5
A-33
Dimensions in the case of lateral mounting
A-34
Dimensions in the case of rear mounting
Introduction Ý Conditions on site
8
A-35
Conditions on site
CAUTION
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Protect desktop devices from moisture or atmospheric influences such as rain, snow etc.
Ensure that the ventilation openings on the sides, the openings for the electric fan on the back of the
device and the openings on the underside of the device are not covered up.
Protect the device from direct sunlight.
Comply with the maximum permitted ambient temperature specified for the system device in the technical data (chapter J).
When installed in 19” fitted cupboards, due to the poor heat dissipation suitable steps must be taken to
ensure that the maximum permissible ambient temperature is not exceeded (see page J-63). In all cases
we recommend forced exhaust ventilation and in particularly critical cases, clearances above and below the rack frame.
Permissible relative humidity at 31 5C is 80 % (non-condensing), reducing linearly to 50 % at 40 5C.
The devices are classed as overvoltage category II, pollution grade 2 equipment.
A-36
9
Introduction Ý Maintenance and cleaning
Maintenance and cleaning
MGCplus system devices are maintenance free. Please note the following points when cleaning the housing:
CAUTION
Withdraw the mains plug from the socket before carrying out any cleaning.
D
D
Clean the housing with a soft, slightly damp (not wet!) cloth. You should on no account use solvent, since it
may damage the labelling on the front panel and the display field.
When cleaning, ensure that no liquid gets into the device or connections.
B-1
B
Connecting
B-2
B-3
Connecting Ý Mains and battery operation: desktop housing
1
Connection: desktop housing
1.1
Mains connection
The NT010 power pack is designed for connection to 230 V (115 V) and
for the maximum configuration of 16 channels. It adapts automatically
to the 115 V/230 V mains supply voltage. The fan on the power pack is
temperature-controlled and automatically cuts out if necessary.
Chassis ground
The power pack is protected with an internal 3.15 A/ T micro-fuse.
CAUTION
The power pack fuse may be changed only by the manufacturer’s
service personnel.
Earthing switch
The earthing switch, in the factory setting (
), links zero operating
voltage to the protection circuit. If external devices (e.g. transducers,
computers) already make this link, and this causes ground circuits to
occur (hum-pickup), the earthing switch must be opened ( ).
Mains connection
Earthing switch
B-4
1.2
Battery connection
Chassis ground
The NT011 power pack is designed for mains−independent battery
operation for a maximum of 16 channels. It adapts automatically to a
12 V/24 V DC supply voltage. The fan on the power pack is
temperature-controlled and automatically cuts out if necessary.
Connections
Earthing switch
Supply voltage (+)
12 V/24 V DC
(−)
To protect against electromagnetic interference, you must wrap the
connection cable round the ferrite ring supplied (3 turns). Position the
ferrite ring as close to the power pack as possible and make sure that
the coils are parallel and close together.
Ferrite ring
Connection cable
Connect the device to the battery via the screw terminals on the back of
the device.
Fuse
CAUTION
Be sure to make all connections with the correct polarity.
Use cable with a wire cross section of 2.5 mm2 to 4 mm2.
B-5
Fuse
Flat-pin fuse 25A F (Colour code colourless). The fuse also acts as a one-way fitting.
Changing the fuse
CAUTION
Disconnect the device from the battery before changing the fuse.
Voltage drop
If the battery voltage drops below 8.5 V (for instance battery low, connection cable too long), the MGCplus is in reset status and is not ready to take measurements (display and LEDs light up). If the voltage returns to more than
10.8 V you may take measurements again. If the battery voltage drops below 7.5 V, the MGCplus switches off (display and LEDs dark) and is only ready for service again if battery voltage returns to 10.8 V.
Earthing switch
), links zero operating voltage to the protection circuit. If external deThe earthing switch, in the factory setting (
vices (e.g. transducers, computers) already make this link, and this causes ground circuits to occur (hum-pickup),
the earthing switch must be opened ( ).
B-6
1.3
Synchronization
Synchronizing a CP22/CP42
Connected devices are automatically detected and synchronized by
dedicated SYNC sockets. The status (master/slave) is displayed by
means of a color−coded LED.
CP42
RS 232
CARDBUS
USB DEVICE
USB HOST
LED
ETHERNET
YE SLAVE
RD ERROR
GN MASTER
IN
SYNC
CTRL I/O
OUT
24V 1 2 GND 1 2
OUT
IN
Synchronization sockets CP42
LED
Status
Green
Master
Yellow
Synchronized slave
Red
Unsynchronized slave
B-7
CP22
RS 232
CTRL I/O
IN
OUT
24Vext
GNDext
USB SLAVE
SYNCRON.
IN
LED
USB MASTER
YE SLAVE
RD
ERROR
GN MASTER
ETHERNET
OUT
SYNCRON.
Synchronization sockets CP22
B-8
2
Connecting Ý ABX22A
Connecting the ABX22A
Blank plate BL12A
Connect the male connector for the mobile ABX22A display and control
unit to the female connector on blank plate BL12A.
Field upgrade:
If you wish to replace an existing AB22A with a mobile ABX22A as
an upgrade, please take note of the following points:
•
•
•
Male connector for the ABX22A:
3-3312.0121, 8-pin,
Series 423 99−5671−15−08
Cable extension female connector:
3-3312.0120, 8-pin,
Series 432 99−5672−15−08
Replace the AB22A with a blank plate BL12A.
Unscrew the cover from the housing
Check the position of the sliding switch and change it if necessary
(see figure below).
B-9
Plan de positionnement des
commutateurs d’interface
(boîtier ouvert, vue de dessus) :
Switch position
seen from above
Display and control
unit
position 1
Boîtier
X
S3 Commutateur CP
S2
S1
Commutateur
d’interfaces
TTL
S2
AB22A
Câble nappe
position 1
Bloc d’alimentation secteur
RS485
position 2
ABX22A
position 2
S1
S2
X
S1
NOTE
If a CP... Communication Processor was subsequently installed,
the S3 CPswitch must be changed over!
Without CP...
seen from above
With CP...
seen from above
CP
CP
yes
S3
no
S3
yes
no
B-10
NOTE
LOG OFF EXTERNAL DISPLAY
Log off
Cancel
When operating devices without a communications processor
but with an ML77B Profibus module, you must log off the
ABX22A before removing the connector cable.
1. Use the shift key
2. Press function key
to return to set-up mode.
.
3. Select ”Log off” from the pull-up menu and confirm
with
.
4. Select the ”Log off” button and confirm with
.
5. When the message ”Now you can disconnect the ABX22A!” is
displayed, you can remove the connector cable.
B-11
Connecting Ý Shielding design
3
Shielding design
Until now:
gr
12
1*
* Pin assignment varies according to
the connection board (see table)
So far, the customary HBM shielding connection has used a male
connector to connect the shield.
This solution provides only limited EMC protection and should no longer
be used.
Earth pin
GREENLINE
AP01i/13i/14/17
AP03i
AP07/1
1
E
YE
New Greenline shielding design:
wh
bk
rd
HBM has developed the Greenline shielding design as an effective
means of improving EMC protection against electromagnetic
interference. The cable shielding is formed in such a way that the whole
of the measurement chain is completely enclosed in a Faraday cage.
bl
gn
gr
NOTE
ye
In the case of connection boards fitted with a terminal connector
(AP07/1), connect the cable shielding to the eyelet on the connection board.
Connecting ➝ Transducers
B-12
4
Connecting transducers
Excitation voltage (+)
When using double-width connection boards (AP03i) only slots 1, 3, 5,
7, 9 and 11i can be occupied by an amplifier. This also applies when
using an AP01i connection board in conjunction with an AP02.
Measurement signal (−)
IMPORTANT:
Measurement signal (+)
Excitation voltage (−)
2
1
Transducer with four-wire connection
4
Cable shielding 1)
3
Sensor circuit (+)
Feedback
bridges
Sensor circuit (−)
If you are connecting a transducer with 4-wire cable, you must connect
the sensor circuit to the appropriate bridge excitation circuit in the
transducer male connector (sensor circuit (−) to excitation voltage (−)
and sensor circuit (+) to excitation voltage (+))*). Any cable extension
must only ever be carried out in six-wire connection.
*)
For cable lengths >50 m, one resistor with half the bridge resistance value (BR/2)
must be wired into the transducer in place of each feedback bridge. If the
transducers are calibrated in six-wire connection, the resistors must be wired directly
into the sensor circuit.
4.1
Amplifier:
B-13
Connecting separate TEDS modules
All MLxxB and ML460
U
AP01i
AP13i
AP455i
1
9
8
15
8
(+)
Operating voltage zero
6
(−)
15
Cable shielding
Geh.
TEDS
TEDS Data
4
9
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey
B-14
4.2
Strain gage full bridges, inductive full bridges
Amplifier:
Amplifier:
SG full bridge
ML30B, ML55B,
ML10B3), ML38B4)
Ind. full bridges
ML50B, ML55B
AP01i
AP13i
AP14
AP455i
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
F
B
WH
BK
2
BL
RD
1
4
3
YE
GN
GR
Measurement
signal (+)
Excitation
voltage (−)
Excitation
voltage (+)
Measurement
signal (−)
Cable shielding 1)
E
D
6
1
2
3
5
4
8
A
1
5
B
2
6
C
3
15
Case
D
4
Case
Case
Sensor circuit (+)
13
F
5
12
G
6
1)
see page B-11
2)
SG full bridges only
3)
Full bridge and Lo must be
set up under bridge type
only use ML38B in connection
with AP01i and AP03i
4)
C
G
AP11i
AP455iS6
4.3
B-15
SG full bridges with AP810/AP815i
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP810/AP815i
Sub-channel Sub-channel
1
14
Sub-channel
Sub-channel
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
2
5
8
11
Sub-channel 1...4
13
2
1
Measurement
signal (+)
BK
Excitation
voltage (−)
Excitation
voltage (+)
Measurement
signal (−)
BL
14
RD
1
Sub-channel 5...8
13
WH
25
25
4
3
YE
GN
GR
Cable shielding 1)
1
4
7
10
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
Case
Case
Case
Case
Sensor circuit (+)
16
19
22
25
14
17
20
23
1)
see also page B-11
Wire colours: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey
B-16
4.4
Strain gage half bridges, inductive half bridges
Amplifier:
SG half bridges
ML30B2), ML55B,
ML10B3)
Amplifier:
Ind. half bridges
ML50B, ML51,
ML55B
WH
BK
2
BL
1
YE
3
GN
GR
1)
2)
3)
AP01i
AP13i
AP14
AP455i
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
F
B
8
C
G
A
E
D
AP11i
AP455iS6
6
1
2
3
5
4
1
5
B
2
6
C
3
Cable shielding 1)
Case
Case
Case
Sensor circuit (+)
13
F
5
12
G
6
see page B-11
only in conjunction with AP14
Half bridge and Lo must be
set up under bridge type
Wire colours: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray
4.5
B-17
LVDT-Transducer
Amplifier: ML455
AP455i
AP455iS6
6
1
2
3
5
4
LVDT-Transducer
8
5
6
15
Cable shield 1)
case
Sensor circuit (+)
13
1
2
3
Case
12
5
6
B-18
4.6
SG half bridges with AP810/AP815i
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP810/AP815i
1
Sub−channel Sub−channel
14
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
Sub−channel
1...4
13
1
25
2
1
14
Sub−channel 4
14
25
3
20
23
1
4
7
10
2
5
8
11
Case
Case
Case
18
21
24
9
12
22
25
WH/RD
WH/GN
Measuring signal (+)
Cable shielding
Case
GN
Measuring signal (−); AP815ii only
15
WH/BR
3
6
BN
Sensor circuit (+)
5...8
13
17
RD
16
1)
19
see page B-11
Wire colours: WH= white; BL= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown
B-19
4.7
Connecting a single strain gage
4.7.1
Compensating resistor external
Amplifier: ML55B, ML10B
AP01i
AP13i
AP455i
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
F
B
WH
BK
2
BL
C
G
E
D
YE
R
3
GN
GR
1)
6
1
2
3
5
4
8
A
1
5
B
2
6
C
3
ε
1
AP11i
Cable shielding 1)
Case
Case
Case
Sensor circuit (+)
13
F
5
12
G
6
see page B-11
R - compensating resistor
B-20
4.7.2
Compensating resistor external with AP815i
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP810/AP815i
1
14
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
Sub−channel
1...4
13
1
25
2
1
14
Sub−channel 4
14
25
3
20
23
1
4
7
10
2
5
8
11
Case
Case
Case
18
21
24
9
12
22
25
WH/RD
WH/GN
Cable shielding
Case
GN
Measuring signal (−); AP815ii only
15
WH/BR
3
6
BN
Sensor circuit (+)
5...8
13
17
RD
16
1)
19
see page B-11
Wire colours: WH= white; BL= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown
4.7.3
B-21
Single strain gage with AP14
Amplifier: ML30B, ML55B,
ML10B
AP14
SG
1
9
8
15
12
5
SG
Case
Sensor circuit (+)
15
8
Three-wire connection* Four-wire connection*
*
Must be set up under bridge type
B-22
4.7.4
Single strain gage with AP814Bi
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP814Bi
1
Sub-channels
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
2
15
5
18
5
8
21
11
24
Case
Sub-channel 1...8
13
25
Excitation
voltage (−)
SG
Cable shielding 1)
Case
Case
Case
Case
Case
Case
Case
Excitation
voltage (+)
15
14
16
17
19
15
20
22
23
25
8
1
3
4
6
8
7
9
10
12
Sensor circuit (+)
Three-wire connection
1)
see also page B-11
4.7.5
B-23
Single strain gage with AP815i
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP815i
Sub−channel
1
14
1/5
Sub−channel Sub−channel Sub−channel
2/6
3/7
4/8
Sub−channel
1...4
13
2
25
2’
1
WH/RD
RD
1
4
7
10
14
17
20
23
Case
Case
8
11
21
24
14
S.G.
5...8
Case
Cable shield
Sub−channel
13
1
WH/GN
2
4
GN
15
25
1)
Case
5
18
see page B-11
B-24
4.7.6
Amplifier:
SG systems and rosettes on AP815i
ML801B
sub-channel
1
AP815i
2
1
2’
14
SG
sub-channel 5
SG
4/8
SG
3/7
SG
2/6
SG
1
1
14
Cable shielding
Case
sub-channel
2/6
sub-channel
3/7
1...4
13
1
25
4
2
sub-channel
15
4/8
14
sub-channel
5...8
13
1
Measurement
signal (+)
25
sub-channel
5
18
5
8
21
11
24
2
15
You can operate a maximum of eight 120 W SGs on a 5 V feed. Make sure that sensor probe 2’ on the SG system
is as close as possible to the single strain gages and that the gaps between the single strain gages are small.
B-25
If the gaps between the single strain gages cannot be kept small (for example two 90° rosettes at different places),
they should be connected as follows:
Amplifier:
ML801B
sub-channel
1
AP815i
2
2’
1
SG
2
14
SG
1
sub-channel
1...4
13
1
14
Cable shielding
Case
1
Measurement
signal (+)
4
25
sub-channel
2
2
15
5
18
14
sub-channel
5
sub-channel
5...8
13
1
2
25
2’
SG
4
SG
3
1
14
Cable shielding
Geh.
1
Measurement
signal (+)
4
sub-channel
6
2
15
5
18
B-26
4.8
Torque flange T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2
4.8.1
Torque measurement
Amplifier:
ML60B
Male
connector 1
Md
AP17
BK
BL
2
3
RD
4
1
WH
GR
1)
8
15
5
Supply voltage (18V ... 30V)
6
Measurement signal torque, frequency output (+)
12
Measurement signal torque, frequency output (−)
13
Cable shielding
GN
9
Supply voltage (0V)
YE
7/56
1
1)
Case
Calibration signal trigger (approx. 5V)
14
Ground
8
see page B-11
Connection cable K−T10F Option 5, Code V5, V6, W1, W2.
For connection of version T10F−KF1 see chapter 4.9
Amplifier:
B-27
ML460
AP460i
7
6
8
5
9 10
4
1
2
3
Male
connector1
Md
2
3
RD
4
1
WH
YE
7/5 6
Measurement signal torque, frequency output (+)
Measurement signal torque, frequency output (−)
1
2
Cable shielding 1)
Case
Ground
10
GN
GR
1)
see page B-11
For connection of version T10F−KF1 see chapter 4.9
B-28
AP460i Pin assignment
LEMO) connector female
Pin
(Top view)
1
Frequency signal 1, Input a
2
Frequency signal 1, Input b
3
Frequency signal 2, Input a
4
Frequency signal 2, Input b
5
Zero index, Input a
6
Zero index, Input b
7
Transducer supply (0 V, 5 V, 8 V or 16 V, depending on jumper position, see
page B-40)
8
Transducer identification (Dallas protocol)
9
Supply mass
10
Signal mass
7
6
9
10
8
5
4
1
2
Function
3
Connection:
Symmetrical input signal (RS 422):
Input a / Input b
Asymmetrical input signal, bipolar:
Input a (Signal mass at Input b)
Asymmetrical input signal, unipolar:
Input a (Signal mass at Pin 10, Input b must stay open)
4.8.2
Amplifier:
B-29
Rotation speed measurement
(symmetrical signals)
ML60B
Male
connector 2
n
AP17
WH
6
7
GN
15
Measurement signal, rotation speed 0° (+)
12
Measurement signal, rotation speed 0° (−)
13
14
Cable shielding
3
GR
1)
8
8
Ground
1
9
BK
and
BL
RD
8
1
1)
Case
15
see page B-11
Connection cable K−T10F Option 5, Code W1, W2.
For connection of version T10F−KF1 see chapter 4.9.
B-30
Amplifier:
ML460i
AP460i
7
6
8
5
9 10
4
1
2
Male
connector 2
n
YE
RD
8
1
WH
6
7
GN
GR
10
1
Measurement signal, rotation speed, 0° (−)
2
Cable shielding 1)
3
1)
Ground
Measurement signal, rotation speed, 0° (+)
4
Case
3
see page B-11
3
4.8.3
Amplifier:
B-31
(symmetrical signals) with reference signal
ML60B
Male
connector 2
n
AP17
YE
8
1
WH
6
7
3 4
GN
BL
BK
GR
see page B-11
15
12
13
14
1)
Case.
Reference signal (+)
2
Reference signal (−)
3
5V (out)
1)
8
Cable shielding
2
9
8
Ground
RD
1
15
11
Connection cable K−T10FS option 6, Code W5, W6
Wire colors: YE= yellow; RD= red; WH= white; GN= green; BL= blue; BK= black; GR= grey
B-32
Amplifier:
ML460
AP460i
7
6
8
5
9 10
4
1
2
Male
connector 2
n
YE
RD
8
1
WH
6
7
3 4
GN
BK
GR
10
1
2
Cable shielding 1)
2
BL
1)
Ground
Measurement signal, rotation speedl, 0° (+)
4
Case
Reference signal (+)
5
Reference signal (−)
6
3
see page B-11
Wire colors: YE= yellow; RD= red; WH= white; GN= green; BL= blue; BK= black; GR= grey
3
B-33
4.9
Torque transducers (T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1)
4.9.1
Torque measurement
(square-wave excitation voltage)
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP07 /1
(MD)
A
F
B
C
G
E
D
with
T34FN
only
Transducer
shaft
Md
1)
GN
WH
YE
BK
PK
BL
WH
RD
YE
BN
GN
GR
GR
see page B-11
Zero operating voltage
A
Supply voltage preamplifier (−15V)
B
Supply voltage preamplifier (+15V)
C
Measurement signal, torque,
12V (5...30V) peak, 5...15kHz
Cable shielding 1)
D
Case
Rotor square-wave excitation voltage 54V/81V
F
Rotor square-wave excitation voltage 0V
G
Connection cable Kab 139A with male MS connector
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; PK= pink; BN= brown
For connection of version T10F−SF1/SU2 see chapter 4.8
B-34
Amplifier:
ML460
AP460i
7
6
8
5
9 10
4
1
2
with
T34FN
only
Transducer
shaft
Md
1)
GN
WH
WH
RD
YE
Measurement signal, torque,
12V (5...30V) peak, 5...15kHz
Cable shielding 1)
10
1
Case
see page B-11
For connection of version T10F−SF1/SU2 see chapter 4.8
3
4.9.2
Amplifier:
B-35
(asymmetrical signals)
ML60B
AP01i
AP13i
1
9
8
15
AP03i
AP07/1(N)
A
B
C
F
G
E
D
AP11i
6
1
2
3
5
4
with
T34FN
only
WH
Trans−
ducer
shaft
n
BK
RD
YE
BL
1)
WH
GR
Measurement signal, rotation speed,
25V (5...30V) peak-to-peak (90o out-ofphase for angle of rotation detection)
8
A
1
D
4
Cable shielding 1)
Case
Case
Case
25V (5 ...30V) peak-to-peak
12
G
6
15
see page B-11
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray
B-36
Amplifier:
ML460
AP460i
7
6
8
5
9 10
4
1
2
with
T34FN
only
Trans−
ducer
shaft
n
WH
WH
BK
RD
YE
BL
1)
GR
25V (5...30V) peak−to−peak (90o outof-phase for angle of rotation detection)
Cable shielding 1)
Measurement signal, rotation
speed, 25V (5 ...30V) peak−to−peak
10
3
Case
1
see page B-11
3
B-37
4.10
Torque transducers (T1A, T4A/WA-S3, T5, TB1A)
4.10.1
Torque measurement
(slip ring or direct cable connection)
Amplifier:
ML30B, ML55B, ML10B
AP01i
AP13i
AP142)
AP455i
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
F
B
WH
BK
2
BL
RD
1
4
YE
C
G
Measurement
signal (+)
Excitation
voltage (−)
Excitation
voltage (+)
Measurement
signal (−)
Cable shielding 1)
Case
Sensor circuit (+)
13
F
12
G
6
1
2
3
5
4
8
A
1
5
B
2
6
C
3
15
D
4
Case
3
Feedback bridges for
transducers in four-wire connection *
E
D
AP11i
Cas
e
5
6
1)
see page B-11
SG full bridge only
*) For transducers in six-wire connection:
see connection diagram Page B-14
2)
B-38
4.10.2
Amplifier:
Rotation speed and angle of rotation
measurement (T4WA-S3)
ML60B
AP01i
AP13i
1
AP03i
9
A
B
15
8
BK
RD
Transducer
shaft
n
GR
YE
GN
Supply voltage +5V
speed, 25V (5...30V)
peak-to-peak 1) (90o out-of-phase
for angle of rotation detection)
Cable shield 2)
Measurement signal,
rotation speed, 25V (5
...30V) peak-to-peak
1)
for AP17 nominal voltage 5V (3...20V)
2)
see page B-11
AP11i
C
F
G
E
D
AP17
1
9
8
15
6
1
2
3
5
4
8
A
1
8
13
F
5
11
15
Case
12
D
4
15
Case
Case
Case
G
6
12
Amplifier:
B-39
ML460
AP460i
7
6
9
10
8
Attention: You can connect a maximum of 3 Transducer
shafts T4WAS3 to each MGCplus device.
5
4
1
2
BK
Jumper
RD
Transducer
shaft
n
GR
YE
GN
Supply voltage +5V 1)
speed, 25V (5...30V) peak−to−peak
(90o out-of-phase for angle of
rotation detection)
Cable shielding 2)
speed, 25V (5 ...30V) peak to peak
1)
Change jumper on 5V, see page B-40
2)
see page B-11
3
9
10
7
3
Case
1
Jumper (Factory setting 0 V)
Connection board AP460i (Side view)
Supply voltage +5 V
Supply voltage +8 V
No function (only for special versions)
No function (only for special versions)
Supply voltage +16 V
B-40
4.10.3
Amplifier:
B-41
Rotation speed measurement with inductive
transducers
ML460i
AP460i
7
6
9
10
8
5
1
4
2
Measurement signal,
rotation speed (+)
1
1 kW
Umax = 30 V
Measurement signal,
rotation speed (−)
3
5 kW
5V
2
Inductive
rotation speed
measuring device
(T−R coil)
Please refer to the setup instructions for T−R coils on page E-38.
B-42
4.11
Thermocouples
Amplifier:
ML01B
AP09
AP409
AP809
+
−
+
−
1 2
Extension wire
Connect
shield here
Thermocouple
−
2
−
−
+
1
+
+
Case
Cas
Case
Case
Cable shield
e
Extension wire
Type
1 (+)
2 (−)
J
K
T
S
Iron
Nickel-chrome
Copper
Rhodium-platinum
Cupro-nickel
Nickel
Cupro-nickel
Platinum
Amplifier:
B-43
ML801B
AP4091)
AP809
+
−
+
Miniature thermo-connector, uncompensated
−
Extension wire
Thermocouple
(−)
−
−
(+)
+
+
Extension wire
Miniature thermo-connector
(For compatible type see table)
Type
(+)
J
K
T
S
Iron
Cupro-nickel
Nickel-chrome
Nickel
Copper
Cupro-nickel
Rhodium-platinum Platinum
1)
(−)
Maximum common-mode voltage about earth 50V; channels 1 to 4 electrically isolated from each other and system.
B-44
4.12
Amplifier:
DC voltage sources
ML01B
Maximum input voltage relative
to earth ="12 V
AP01i
AP13i
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
B
C
AP09
AP11i
F
G
6
1
2
3
E
D
5
4
1 2
U
(+)
8
Zero operating
voltage3)
6
(−)
Cable shield 1)
A
1
1
2)
C
3
15
D
2
4
Case
Case
Case
Case
1) see page B-11
Connect the negative pole of the voltage source to one of the pins 22...25 on the 25-pin female connector Bu2 (earth pin) (in the case of the AP13i, only pin 25 can be used)
3) In the case of a potential-free DC voltage source, you must connect pin 15 to pin 6.
2)
Amplifier:
ML801B
B-45
AP801
AP801S6
3
4
to earth = "50 V
U
(+)
Case
U
(−)
2
1
(+)
1
(−)
2
Supply voltage 8 V/16 V*)
3
Supply voltage 0 V
4
Case
*)
Changeover supply voltage see page B-46
B-46
Supply voltage +16 V
No function (for special versions only)
Jumper
No function (for special versions only)
Supply voltage +8 V
Connection board AP801S6 (side view)
Amplifier:
ML801B
B-47
AP401
Sight of coupler socket
4x
U
(wiring side)
2
1
3
4
(+)
Case.
(−)
Pin assignment
1
+ In
2
not in use
3
not in use
4
− In
B-48
4.13
Amplifier:
DC power source
ML01B
AP01i
AP13i
to earth = ±12 V
(−)
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
B
C
F
G
E
D
AP11i
6
1
2
3
5
4
6
C
3
5
B
2
Case
Case
I
(+)
Cable
1)
shielding 1)
see page B-11
Case
4.14
Amplifier:
B-49
Resistors, Pt10, 100, 1000
ML35B
AP01i
AP13i
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
F
B
Three-wire
connection
R
C
G
E
D
AP11i
1
2
3
6
5
4
Four-wire connection
Excitation
5
B
2
Sensor circuit *
12
G
6
R
Cable shielding 1)
Case
Case
Case
Sensor circuit
13
F
5
Excitation
6
C
3
*
When connecting a two-wire sensor, wire bridges must be
soldered into the male connector (between the sensor circuit and
the excitation voltage)
1) see page B-11
B-50
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP835
1
4
2
3
Excitation
1
Sensor circuit
2
R
Cable shielding
3
Excitation
4
Pt100 with four wire circuit only
Case
Sensor circuit
4.15
Amplifier:
B-51
Frequency measurement without a
direction of rotation signal
ML60B
AP01i
AP13i
AP17
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
B
Frequency
generator /
Pulse
generator
Cable shielding 1)
Rotation speed/pulse signal 1 (frequency)
1)
see page B-11
C
F
G
E
D
AP11i
1
2
3
8
A
1
Case
Case
Case
G
6
12
6
5
4
Case = housing
In this operating mode, deactivate f2 signal evaluation (default: OFF), see page E-44.
B-52
4.16
Amplifier:
Frequency measurement with direction
of rotation signal
ML60B
AP01i
AP13i
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
B
*)
see page B-11
E
D
1
2
3
A
Cable shielding 1)
Case
Case
Case
Speed/Impulse signal 1
(Frequency f1)
12
G
6
15
D
4
Rotation speed/pulse signal 1
(frequency f2)
1)
F
G
8
Frequency
generator /
Impulse
generator
C
AP11i
6
5
4
1
Case = Housing
F2 signal evaluation has been deactivated by default. For measurements with signal of direction, you must activate the f2 signal, see
page E-44.
4.17
Amplifer:
B-53
Impulse counting
ML60B
AP01i
AP13i
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
B
f2
f1
Industrial
pulse generator
Zero index
Transducer error
C
F
G
E
D
AP11i
AP460i
6
1
2
3
5
4
8
A
1
9
15
D
4
3
12
G
6
1
6
C
3
5
5
B
2
B-54
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP17
Zero index +
Zero index −
f1+
Industrial
pulse generator
f1−
f2−
f2+
Transducer error
1
9
8
15
AP460i
2
5
3
6
12
1
13
2
14
4
15
3
4.18
B-55
Active and passive piezoelectric transducers
Passive piezoelectric transducer
Amplifier:
ML10B, ML01B
with AP08
Current-fed piezoelectric transducer
AP08
Amplifier:
ML10B,
ML01B with
AP18i/AP418i
AP18i
AP418 i
Adjustment
potentiometer for
current feed
Shield
Piezoelectric
transducer with
preamplifier
(with T-ID/
TEDS for
AP418i)
Piezoelectric
transducer
Input *
*
Shield
Input *
Use special coaxial cable see page E-66
Advice for connection boards AP08, AP18i, AP418i:
If the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms or if the transducer connection cable is longer
than 30 m, then this cable must be protected against high voltage with an additional, separately grounded shield.
This can be achieved laying the cable in a metallic pipe or by using double shielded cables, where the external
shield near by the connection board must be grounded (connect to ground or ground wire). For this purpose
HBM recommend to use Triaxial cables.
B-56
4.19
Piezoresistive transducers
Amplifier: ML10B2)
AP01i
AP13i
AP03i
1
9
8
15
A
F
B
Measurement
signal (+)
Excitation
voltage (−)
Excitation
voltage (+)
2
1
4
Measurement
signal (−)
Cable shielding 1)
8
C
G
A
E
D
AP11i
6
1
2
3
5
4
1
5
B
2
6
C
3
15
Case
D
4
Case
Case
3
1)
Sensor circuit (+)
13
F
5
12
G
6
see page B-11
4.20
B-57
Potentiometric transducers (single−channel)
Amplifier: ML10B2)
AP01i
AP13i
1
9
8
15
AP03i
A
F
B
Measurement
signal (+)
Excitation
voltage (−)
Excitation
voltage (+)
2
8
C
G
A
E
D
AP11i
6
1
2
3
5
4
1
5
B
2
6
C
3
1
Cable shielding 1)
Case
Case
Case
3
1)
see page B-11
2)
You will need to set up
Sensor circuit (+)
13
F
5
12
G
6
and Hi under bridge type
B-58
4.21
Potentiometric transducers (Multi−channel)
Amplifier: ML801B
AP836
Sub−channels
1
2/6
3/7
4/8
14
Sub−channel 1...4
13
1/5
25
2
2
5
8
11
1
4
7
10
3
6
9
12
1
Cable shield 1)
3
Sub−channel 5...8
Case
Case
Case
Case
Sensor circuit (+)
16
19
22
25
14
17
20
23
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray; BN= brown
4.22
B-59
Connection via distributor board VT814i
Single−S.G.; 3−wire connection with AP814
1−Kab156−3
2
Single−S.G.; 3−wire connection with AP814Bi
3
2
S.G.
1
RJ45 socket
WH/GN Excitation voltage (+)
3
S.G.
RD
2
Cable shield
1’
1−Kab156−3
RJ45 socket
WH/GN Excitation voltage (−)
1
RD
Cable shield
Case
WH/RD Excitation voltage (+)
Measuring signal
1
1’
2
Case
WH/RD Excitation voltage (−)
1
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown
Connection diagram
Measuring point
Distributor board VT814
Connection board
AP814Bi
S.G. 1
1−Kab156−3
RJ45
1
D-Sub25
S.G. 2
D-Sub25
1−Kab263−3
1−AP814Bi
1−Kab156−3
2
S.G. 8
1−Kab156−3
8
A detailed connection diagram has been supplied with the distributor board.
B-60
4.23
Connection via distributor board VT810/815i
Single−S.G.; 4−wire connection
1−Kab156−3
2
WH/RD
S.G. half bridge
RJ45 socket
1−Kab156−3
1
2
2’
RD
2
1
RD
2
WH/RD
1
WH/GN
S.G.
Cable shield
Cable shield
Case
1
WH/GN
3
4
GN
6
4
3
1−Kab156−3
Measuring signal (−); only AP815i
6
WH/BN
BN
Sensor circuit (+)
7
8
2
1
3
RD
2
WH/RD
1
GN
Measuring signal (−)
6
WH/BN
7
BN
Sensor circuit (+)
4
3
RJ45 socket
Cable shield
8
Case
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown
3
Case
GN
S.G. full bridge
WH/GN
RJ45 socket
B-61
Connection diagram
Measuring point
Distributor board VT810/815i
Connection board AP810/815i
D-Sub25
S.G. 1
1−Kab156−3
RJ45
1
D-Sub25
S.G. 2
1−Kab263−3
1−Kab156−3
2
D-Sub25
1−Kab263−3
1−AP810
1−AP815i
S.G. 8
1−Kab156−3
8
B-62
Connecting Ý MGCsplit
5
Connecting the MGCsplit modules
5.1
Split-line-cable
CAUTION
Only original split-line connecting cable that has been made up and tested by HBM must be used for
cabling MGCsplit systems.
If other cable is used it will be impossible to guarantee error-free operation and we accept no responsibility
for any resulting loss or damage.
B-63
5.2
Power supply units NT650/NT651
1−NT650
ATTENTION
The power supply units have fine-wire fuses. The fuses may only
be replaced by the manufacturer’s service personnel.
Connecting the power supply
The power supply units NT650/NT651 supply the MGCsplit-modules
with a direct voltage of 28 V. The input voltage range is 10 V ... 50 V
(DC). The power supply units are not potentially isolated.
The power supply unit NT650 is specially designed for test drives and
can bridge voltage interruptions of up to 10 seconds 15 minutes after
being switched on (if 10 measurement modules are connected). The
buffer capacitors are automatically recharged as long as the power
supply unit is switched on.
Use a 4-wire cable for the supply line with a wire cross-section of 0.5
mm2. Always connect all 4 wires.
Avoid high contact resistances (e.g. due to corroded plug connectors)!
Voltage supply
Matching plug
(view of connection side)
4
1
3
2
Voltage supply (device plug POWER IN)
Pin
Function
1
Input voltage (10…50V DC)
2
Input voltage (10…50V DC)
3
Input voltage (0V DC)
4
Input voltage (0V DC)
Device plug:
G82BFC−T04MPH0−0000
Recommended cable jack:
S32BFC−T04LPH0−6000
(suitable for crimp mounting and cable diameter 5.5 mm ... 6 mm)
B-64
1−NT650
Input
Output
You can connect a maximum of 10 modules (1x SH400CP and 9x
SH400 or SH650) or, if using a ABX22 display- and control panel, a
maximum of 9 modules. If more MGCsplit-modules (up to 1x SH400CP,
16x SH400 or SH650 and 1x ABX22) are to be operated, you will need
an additional power supply unit. Both power supply units should in this
case be arranged directly behind one another.
Connect the MGCsplit measuring system to the sockets ”SPLIT−LINE
IN” and ”SPLIT−LINE OUT”. Only use the Split Line cable from HBM.
You can connect the power supply unit at any point in the measuring
system. Just interrupt the SPLIT−LINE and connect the power supply
unit in between.
Connection at the start of the system (before the SH400CP):
Advantage: if there is a power failure, the communication processor
CPxx receives a warning signal from the NT650 if the energy only
suffices for another ca. 5 seconds. It can therefore finish the
measurement in a defined manner.
Connection in the middle (e.g. between two SH650 measurement
modules):
Advantage: Good power distribution (less losses in the supply lines).
B-65
Split-Line-connections
Matching plug
Pin
1
16
*)
Function
1
Output voltage (28V DC) for MGCsplit supply
2
3
4
5
−*)
6
−*)
7
−*)
8
−*)
9
−*)
10
−*)
11
−*)
12
−*)
13
Power Down Signal at CP module (NT650 only)
14
Earth potential MGCsplit
15
−*)
16
−*)
Signal at these pins are looped through from SPLIT−LINE IN to SPLIT−LINE OUT.
Device connector:
G82B0C−T16QF00−0000
Recommended cable connector:S32B0C−T16MPFG0−7500
(suitable for crimp mounting and cable diameter 7 mm ... 7.5 mm)
B-66
1−NT650
CAN-connections
Pin
CANinput
(**)
Function
1
CAN signal (Low)
2
CAN earth
3
Input for ext. CAN supply voltage (**)
4
CAN signal (High)
5
Digital input for remote control of NT650/NT651
6
Ground reference of digital input NT_ON
Currently not required
Device connector:
G82BAC−T06QPH00−0000
Recommended cable connector:S32BAC−T06MPH0−6000
(suitable for crimp mounting and cable diameter 5.5 mm ... 6 mm)
Matching plug
5
1
6
2
4
3
With pin 5 you can switch the power supply unit on or off remotely. The
mains switch must be in the position ”REMOTE”. A change in the level
from over 3V to under 1V or vice versa causes switching, either from
”OFF” to ”ON” or from ”ON” to ”OFF”.
The CAN bus is connected to pins 1 and 4, the earth may also be
required. A CAN terminating resistor is not present in the power supply
unit, if necessary you must add one externally. Switching on and off is
implemented with two predefined messages (see Page B-67).
The galvanically isolated digital input NT_ON is related to GNDM.
GNDM can if necessary be connected with pin 6 (0V_IN).
B-67
Switch settings
Switch
setting
Significance (with connected supply)
ON
The power supply unit is switched on, connected MGCsplit
measuring systems are supplied with 28 V DC. (*)
OFF
The power supply unit is switched off, connected MGCsplit
measuring systems are not supplied. (*)
REMOTE
a) Directly after switching from switch position OFF or after
deactivation via CAN or digital input:
The power supply unit is switched off, green LED flashes every 2s,
connected MGCsplit-measuring system is only supplied when it is
activated via the CAN or digital input.
b) After activation via CAN or digital input:
The power supply unit is switched on, green LED lights up,
connected MGCsplit measuring systems are supplied with 28 V DC.
(*)
(*) NT650 only: The buffer capacitors are automatically recharged when
necessary (additional power consumption up to ca. 8W).
Manual on/off switching
Turn the ”POWER” switch to the ”ON” or ”OFF” position.
Remote on/off switching
In the switch position ”REMOTE”, you can switch the power supply unit
on/off via the CAN bus. Standard CAN is supported as per ISO11898
(Transceiver PCA82C251). A switch on and switch off message are
defined.
CAN-message for switching on/off:
CAN-parameter
Significance
Baud Rate
250 kBit/s
ID
0x83
DLC
2
Data switch on message
0x79, 0x78
Data switch off message
0x79, 0x70
B-68
Ensure that a terminating resistor (120 Ohm) is present on both ends of
the CAN bus. The listed CAN parameters are preset but can be
adapted by HBM on request.
Remote control via digital input
In the switch position ”REMOTE”, the power supply unit can be
switched on/off via a galvanically isolated digital input.
Switching on/off is flank controlled, i.e. switching occurs when a flank is
detected, either from ”OFF” to ”ON” or from ”ON” to ”OFF”.
A flank is detected when the actual level of the signal ”NT_ON”
changes from < 1V to > 3V (rising flank) or from > 3V to < 1V (falling
flank).
Remote control via CAN and digital input
Both variants can be combined, e.g. switching on via CAN switch on
message, switching off with rising or falling flank at the digital input.
Bridging of voltage failures (NT650 only):
The power supply unit NT650 is equipped with so-called ”buffer
capacitors” which are fully loaded within 15 minutes of the supply
voltage being connected. If the power fails (e.g. during the vehicle
starting procedure), the power supply unit is supplied by these
capacitors.
A connected MGCsplit system with maximum modules can be supplied
for at least 10 seconds, correspondingly longer if less modules are
connected.
If a CP module is directly connected to the Split Line output and the
capacitor feed is active, then the CP module will receive a warning
signal (PDWN_CP based on GNDD) ca. 5 seconds before the buffer
energy is exhausted and can therefore end a current measurement
data recording in a defined manner.
B-69
Once the input voltage is again available, discharged buffer capacitors
are recharged, regardless of the NT650 switch position. Recharging
can take up to 15 minutes if the buffer capacitors are fully discharged.
A drop in capacitor voltage through self-discharge is also detected and
compensated for by cyclical recharging. However, this requires that the
NT650 is continually supplied with voltage.
In order to achieve correct switching from external supply to capacitor
supply, the supply lines must be as short and as low impedance as
possible. Too many or poor plug connections can also affect the
bridging function due to transition impedance. This must be taken into
account when using numerous modules and low supply voltages.
Operating states and errors, LED displays:
Two LEDs are located on the front panel, these can display various
operating states and errors.
B-70
1−NT650
Operating and error status display via status LEDs:
POWER STATUS
(green LED)
ERROR STATUS
(Red LED)
Significance
Operating states
Green LED
Red LED
ON
OFF
Switch setting: ON or REMOTE, NT65x
ON, normal operation, no error
OFF
OFF
a) NT65x not supplied
b) Switch position OFF, NT65x OFF,
normal operation, no error
Flashes every 2s
OFF
Switch position REMOTE, NT65x OFF,
normal operation, no error
Error states
ON
Flashes once per
second
NT650 only:
Switch position ON or REMOTE, NT650
ON, supply voltage failure, power supply
unit operation via buffer capacitors.
Error rectification: Restore correct
supply.
ON
Flashes twice per
second
NT650 only: Switch position ON or
REMOTE, NT650 ON, voltage supply
failure, power supply unit operation via
buffer capacitors which are already
discharged to ca. 15 − 20% of their initial
energy level. Error rectification: Restore
correct supply.
OFF
ON
a) Switch position ON or REMOTE,
active NT65x is switched off due to
excess temperature.
Error rectification: Switch to OFF, check
load and allow device to cool, switch
NT65x back on.
b) Switch position ON or REMOTE,
NT65x switched off due to overload (e.g.
short circuit).
Error rectification: Switch to OFF, rectify
overload, switch NT65x back on.
B-71
Schematic circuit diagram of battery cable
RL
RK
UBat
RL
RL
Iin =
Pin
Umin
NT650
SH400CP
Umin
Pin
RK
Terminal
RL
Cable
Equation for minimum battery voltage calculation
ǒ
U Bat U min 2 R K 2 l Ǔ
P
R ȀL
in
2
U min
Example:
Umin = 10V, Pin = 100W
RK = 20mW (estimated transition resistances of terminals and plug connectors)
R ȀL = 24mW/m (cable resistance with cable cross-section of 0.75mm2)
l = 3m (cable length)
UBat 11.12V
ATTENTION
Keep the cable short and avoid unnecessary transition resistances to keep the voltage drop as small as
possible.
B-72
Battery voltage [V]
Minimum required battery voltage UBat [V]
Cable length [m]
B-73
5.3
Amplifier modules and connection boards in the
1−SH400 enclosure
5.3.1
Amplifier modules that can be connected
The following amplifier modules from the MGCplus system can be used in the MGCsplit system (with effect from
hardware version 1.31 and higher):
Amplifier module
Software version
ML01B
P5.33
ML10B
P5.33
ML30B
P5.33
ML35B
P5.33
ML50B
P5.33
ML55B
P5.33
ML55BS6
P5.33
ML60B
P5.20
ML70B
P1.33
ML71B
P1.80
ML71S6
P1.28
ML77B
P2.02
ML78B
P1.53
ML460
P1.13
ML801B
P5.18
B-74
5.3.2
Connection boards
You can use any connection board from the MGCplus system. In the case of the transducer excitation the following
special features apply:
AP17
The torque transducers must be energized by means of an external power supply (except for T10F−SF1 and SU2).
AP460i
The transducer excitation (DC) may be adjusted to 5 V, 8 V, 16 V. Maximum current per connection board is
50 mA.
AP801S6
The transducer excitation may be 8 V or 16 V. Maximum output current is 50 mA.
Note
In the event of higher loads the module concerned may be automatically shut down.
B-75
5.4
Connecting the MGCsplit modules
1−SH400CP
ABX22A
external
display
and
control
panel
Input
Output
Suitable connector
Connection end view
1
16
*)
Pin
Input
Output
1
Power supply 24 − 32 V DC (typically
28 V)
28 V)
2
28 V)
28 V)
3
Power supply 0 V
Power supply 0 V
4
Power supply 0 V
Power supply 0 V
5
Not in use
Link1+
6
Not in use
Link1−
7
Not in use
Link2+
8
Not in use
Link2−
9
SDA_out *)
Rx_A
10
Not in use
Rx_B
*)
Tx_A
11
SDA_in
12
Not in use
Tx_B
13
ResIn*)
ResOut
14
GND digital *)
GND digital
15
SCL *)
Sync_A
16
Not in use
Sync_B
I2C interface and reset are only necessary when using the NT650 power pack
Device connectors:
Recommended male plug:
G82B0C−T16LFG0−0000
S32B0C−T16PFG0−7500
(suitable for crimp fit and cable diameters 7 mm to 7.5 mm)
B-76
5.5
Inputs/outputs for measurement modules
SH400/SH650
1−SH400
Input
Output
1−SH650
Pin
Input
Output
1
28 V)
28 V)
2
28 V)
28 V)
3
Power supply 0 V
Power supply 0 V
4
Power supply 0 V
Power supply 0 V
5
Link1+
Link1+
6
Link1−
Link1−
7
Link2+
Link2+
8
Link2−
Link2−
9
Rx_A
Rx_A
10
Rx_B
Rx_B
Tx_A
11
Tx_A
12
Tx_B
Tx_B
13
ResIn
ResOut
14
GND digital
GND digital
15
Sync_A
Sync_A
16
Sync_B
Sync_B
Input
Device connectors:
Output
G82B0C−T16LFG0−0000
S32B0C−T16PFG0−7500
(suitable for crimp fit and cable diameters 7 mm to 7.5 mm)
Suitable connector
(Connection end view)
1
16
B-77
5.6
AP409 connection boards in the 1−SH650
enclosure
1−SH650−ML801B−409
1−SH650−ML801B−2x409
Pin
Function
1
+ Input
2
− Input
Device connectors:
Transducer
connections
AP409
GX0S0C−P020000−0002*)
Recommended male plugs:
SX0S0C−P020000−0002 (solder contacts, K-Type)
S30S0C−T02PJD0−5000 (crimp contacts, gold)
S30S0C−T02MJG0−5000 (solder contacts, gold)
(suitable for cable diameters 4.5 mm to 5 mm)
*)
Contacts made of K-type thermal material, to avoid measuring errors by temperature
gradients of the connector.
Suitable connector
1
S
2
B-78
5.7
AP401 connection boards in the 1−SH650
enclosure
1−SH650−ML801B−401
1−SH650−ML801B−2x401
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
Transducer
connections
AP401
Function
1
+ Input
2
Not in use
3
Not in use
4
− Input
Device connectors:
G80S0C−T04LFD0−0000
S30S0C−T04MFD0−5000
(suitable for solder contacts and cable diameters 4.5 mm to 5 mm)
Suitable connector
2
1
3
Pin
S
4
B-79
5.8
AP815i connection boards in the 1−SH650
enclosure
1−SH650−ML801B−815
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
Transducer
connections
4
Pin
Half− and Full bridge function
Quarter bridge function
1
2
3
Not in use
4
5
GND (inner shield)
GND (inner shield)
6
Not in use
Not in use
7
Not in use
Not in use
8
Not in use
Not in use
9
Sensor circuit (+)
Not in use
10
Device connectors:
G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000
Suitable connector
S32B0C−T10PJD0−8000 (crimp contacts)
1
S32B0C−T10MJD0−8000 (solder contacts)
8
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
5
See also connection diagrams
SG full bridges with AP810/AP815i in chapter 4.3
SG half bridges with AP810/AP815i in chapter 4.6
Single strain gage with AP815i in chapter 4.7.5
B-80
5.9
enclosure
1−SH650−ML460−460
1
2
Transducer
connections
3
4
Pin
Function
1
Frequency signal 1, input a
2
Frequency signal 1, input b
3
4
5
Zero index, input a
6
Zero index, input b
7
Transducer supply 5V*)
8
Transducer identification
9
Transducer supply ground
10
Signal ground
Device connectors:
G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000
Suitable connector
1
8
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
S32B0C−T10PJD0−8000 (crimp contacts)
S32B0C−T10MJD0−8000 (solder contacts)
5
*)
Maximum total current for all subchannels is 50 mA
B-81
5.10
enclosure
1−SH650−ML55B−AP13i
Digital inputs
The following are valid for all single-channel connection boards:
Digital inputs:
(30° coded female connector)
Digital outputs:
Analog outputs:
Transducers:
Digital inputs:
Suitable connector
1
8
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
5
Pin
Function
1
Ground (control inputs 1/2/3/4)
2
Ground (control inputs 5/6/7/8)
3
Control input 1
4
Control input 2
5
Control input 3
6
Control input 4
7
Control input 5
8
Control input 6
9
Control input 7
10
Control input 8
Device connectors:
G82BAC−T10QJ00−0000 (30° coding)
S32BAC−T10PJD0−8000 (30° coding; crimp contacts)
S32BAC−T10MJD0−8000 (30° coding; solder contacts)
B-82
AP13i connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure
Digital outputs:
Digital outputs
Pin
Function
1
24 V (limit value 1/2)
2
24 V (limit value 3/4)
3
Ground (limit value 1/2)
4
Ground (limit value 3/4)
5
Limit value output 1
6
7
8
9
Warning
10
Not in use
Device connectors:
Suitable connector
1
8
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
5
B-83
Analog outputs:
Analog outputs
Pin
Function
1
Analog ground
2
Voltage output Ua1
3
Not in use
4
Voltage output Ua2
5
Not in use
6
Current output Ia1
7
Not in use
8
Not in use
9
Not in use
10
Not in use
Device connectors:
Suitable connector
1
8
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
5
B-84
Transducers:
Transducer
connection
Pin
Function
1
2
Bridge excitation voltage (−)
3
Bridge excitation voltage (+)
4
5
GND
6
+16 V
7
−16 V
8
SDA
9
Sensor circuit (+)
10
Device connectors:
G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000 (0° coding)
Suitable connector
1
2
8
9
3
7
10
4
6
5
S32B0C−T10PJD0−8000 (0° coding; crimp contacts)
S32B0C−T10MJD0−8000 (0° coding; solder contacts)
B-85
5.11
AP17 connection boards in the 1−SH650 enclosure
1−SH650−ML60B−AP17
Digital inputs
The following are valid for all single−channel connection boards:
Digital inputs:
Digital outputs:
Analog outputs:
Transducers:
Digital inputs
Suitable connector
1
8
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
5
Pin
Function
1
Ground (digital)
2
Control input 1
3
Control input 2
4
Control input 3
5
Control input 4
6
Control input 5
7
Control input 6
8
Control input 7
9
Control input 8
10
Not in use
Device connectors:
B-86
Digital outputs
1−SH650−ML60B−AP17
Digital outputs
Suitable connector
1
8
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
5
Pin
Function
1
Ground (digital)
2
3
4
5
6
Warning
7
Not in use
8
Not in use
9
Not in use
10
Not in use
Device connectors:
B-87
Analog outputs
1−SH650−ML60B−AP17
Analog outputs
Suitable connector
1
8
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
Pin
Function
1
Analog ground to Vo1
2
Voltage output Vo1 (Ra>5 kOhm)
3
Analog ground to Vo2
4
Voltage output Vo2 (Ra>5 kOhm)
5
Analog ground to Vo1 / Io1
6
Vo1 / Io1 (20 mA); Ra<500 Ohm
7
Analog ground to Vo2 / Io2
8
Vo2 / Io2 (20 mA); Ra<500 Ohm
9
Not in use
10
Not in use
Device connectors:
5
B-88
Transducers
1−SH650−ML60B−AP17
Transducer
connection
Suitable connector
8
1
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
5
Pin
Function
1
2
3
4
5
Zero index, input a
6
Zero index, input b
7
Transducer supply +5 V*)
8
9
Transducer supply ground
10
Signal ground
Device connectors:
G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000 (0° coding)
*)
Maximum output current is 50 mA. Please note that torque transducers cannot be fed
from this supply.
B-89
5.12
CAN connections 1 to 2
1−SH650−ML71B−AP71
1
CAN
connections
2
Suitable connector
1
2
8
9
3
7
10
4
6
Pin
Function
1
Not in use
2
CAN_L
3
CAN_GND
4
CAN_V+
5
CAN_Shield
6
GND
7
CAN_H
8
Not in use
9
Not in use
10
Not in use
Device connectors:
G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000 (0° coding)
5
B-90
5.13
The AP78 connection board has a total of ten analog outputs, two of
which are looped through from the ML78B amplifier (VO1 and VO2).
1−SH650−ML78B−AP78
1
Connection 1 (analog output VO1)
Analog outputs
2
3
4
Suitable connector
1
8
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
5
Pin
Function
1
GND to Vo1
2
Analog output from amplifier VO1
3
Not in use
4
Not in use
5
Not in use
6
Not in use
7
Not in use
8
Not in use
9
Not in use
10
Not in use
Connection 2 (analog output VO2)
Pin
Function
1
GND to Vo2
2
Analog output from amplifier VO2
3
Not in use
4
Not in use
5
Not in use
6
Not in use
7
Not in use
8
Not in use
9
Not in use
10
Not in use
B-91
Connection 3 (analog outputs AO3 to AO6)
1−SH650−ML78B−AP78
1
2
3
Analog outputs
4
Pin
Function
1
GND to AO3
2
Analog output AO3
3
GND to AO4
4
Analog output AO4
5
GND to AO5
6
Analog output AO5
7
GND to AO6
8
Analog output AO6
9
Not in use
10
Not in use
Connection 4 (analog outputs AO7 to AO10)
Suitable connector
1
2
8
9
3
7
10
4
6
5
Pin
Function
1
GND to AO7
2
Analog output AO7
3
GND to AO8
4
Analog output AO8
5
GND to AO9
6
Analog output AO9
7
GND to AO10
8
Analog output AO10
9
Not in use
10
Not in use
B-92
1−SH650−ML78B−AP78
Device connectors:
G82B0C−T10QJ00−0000 (0° coding)
1
2
3
4
Suitable connector
1
2
8
9
3
7
10
4
6
5
B-93
5.14
Connection 1 (digital outputs 1 to 4, analog output 1)
1−SH650−ML78B−AP75
1
Digital outputs
and
analog outputs
2
3
4
Pin
Function
1
GND OUT
2
OUT1
3
OUT2
4
OUT3
5
OUT4
6
24 V IN
7
Not in use
8
Not in use
9
GND VO1
10
VO1
Connection 2 (digital outputs 5 to 8, analog output 2)
Suitable connector
1
8
Pin
Function
1
GND OUT
2
OUT5
3
OUT6
2
9
7
4
OUT7
3
10
6
5
OUT8
6
24 V IN
7
Not in use
8
Not in use
9
GND VO2
10
VO2
4
5
B-94
Connection 3 (digital inputs 1 to 4):
1−SH650−ML78B−AP75
1
2
3
Digital inputs
4
Pin
Function
1
GND IN
2
IN1
3
IN2
4
IN3
5
IN4
6
Not in use
7
Not in use
8
Not in use
9
Not in use
10
Not in use
Connection 4 (digital inputs 5 to 8):
Suitable connector
8
1
2
7
9
3
6
10
4
5
Pin
Function
1
GND IN
2
IN5
3
IN6
4
IN7
5
IN8
6
Not in use
7
Not in use
8
Not in use
9
Not in use
10
Not in use
B-95
Device connectors:
1−SH650−ML78B−AP75
1
2
3
4
Suitable connector
1
8
2
9
7
3
10
6
4
5
B-96
6
Connecting Ý CANHEAD
Connecting CANHEAD modules
The ML74 communication card and the AP74 connector plate are required for connecting CANHEAD modules to
the MGCplus systems. A maximum of 12 modules per plug−in amplifier and 24 modules per MGCplus device can
be connected, this amounts to a total of 240 measuring points (a maximum of 256 channels per CP22/CP42 can be
managed in the device). For more information on connection and operation please refer to the “CANHEAD Measurement electronics” mounting instructions.
B-97
6.1
ML74 communication module
ML74
LED
Labeling
Color
Meaning
1
CHAN.
Yellow
Channel has been selected
2
ERROR/
WARN.
Red
Error/Warning
3
Rx
Yellow
Receiving CAN protocol
4
Tx
OVRN
Yellow
Red
Transmitting CAN protocol
Overrun
5
BUS−/ERR
Red
Bus error
6
CONFIG
Yellow
Configuring allocated CANHEADS
7
AP74
STATUS
Yellow
Off
Red
Voltage supply via AP74
No voltage supply via AP74
Error during voltage supply via AP74
8
SCAN
Yellow
Executing bus scan
9
−
−
−
B-98
6.2
AP74 connection board
AP74
LED color
Meaning
Green
Normal state during operation
Red
Short circuit or overload
None
Voltage supply switched off
B-99
ConnectingÝ Interfaces
7
Connecting the computer, PLC and printer
The MGCplus can optionally be fitted with the following interfaces:
Serial interfaces for computer port (CP22/CP42):
• RS 232 C
• USB
• Ethernet
B-100
8
Connecting Ý Shunt resistor
Connecting a shunt resistor
For connection boards there also exists, as an optional solution, a facility for switching the shunt on. An off-the-shelf
shunt on-switch is provided for the AP14 connection board. This compensating resistor creates a bridge mismatch
of 1 mV/V.
B-101
Connecting Ý Outputs and remotes
9
Inputs, Outputs and remotes
9.1
Inputs and Outputs CP22/CP42
The CP22 communication processor provides one digital input and output each. The CP42 communication processor provides two digital inputs and outputs each.
The digital In− and Outputs must be operated with an external feeding
(12 V ... 24 V).
CP42
RS 232
CARDBUS
Inputs (0 V ... 24 V)
The following functions can be assigned to the digital inputs:
USB DEVICE
• Start data acquisition by external trigger (only with CP42)
• Print measured values (with direct connection via USB interface)
• Formfeed
USB HOST
ETHERNET
The MGCplus terminal commands can also be used to query the status
of the inputs and outputs.
YE SLAVE
RD ERROR
GN MASTER
IN
SYNC
CTRL I/O
OUT
24V 1 2 GND 1 2
OUT
IN
Outputs (0 V ... 24 V)
The digital outputs are allocated to the “Disc full” function. If the
remaining storage space on the PC card harddisk in the CP42 unit is
lower than 1 MByte, the output will be set to high.
No function is assigned to the digital outputs. The MGCplus terminal
commands can be used to modify the status.
Inputs and outputs
B-102
Wiring example for the ”Start Trigger” function at the CP42 control inputs
CP42
COM
NO
NC
CTRL I/O
+ −
24V DC
24V
GND1
IN
B-103
Wiring example for the ”Print measured values” function at the CP22 control inputs
COM
CP22
NO
NC
IN
24Vext
GNDext
CTRL I/O
+ −
24V DC
B-104
9.2
Analogue output on the front panel
The front panel of a one-channel module includes a female BNC connector for analogue
output signal VO1. (This female connector is for test purposes. The fixed wiring should
always go through the connection boards, since the noise voltage is smaller here).
NOTE
Please note: the input resistance of the connected device must be greater than 1 MW.
When connecting a coaxial cable to the analog output of the ML60B preamplifier module for
use in Class B environments, acc. to EN55011 or EN55022 (residential premises, business
and trade, and small businesses), a ferrite (Würth, art. No. 742 711 72 or similar) must be
attached to the cable.
9.3
B-105
Connection boards AP01i...AP18i
Connection boards for the amplifier channels are plugged in at the back of the desktop housing, respectively on the
right-hand side of the wall-mounted housing. The female connector on these connection boards provide you not
only with connection facilities for the transducer, but also with several output and control signals, depending on the
chosen option. These are explained in greater detail in the following chapters.
B-106
9.3.1
Pin assignment AP01i/03i/05/08/09/11i/14/17/18i
PIN
1
13
14
25
Bu 2
Outputs
OUTPUT
Function
1
Digital
2
Remote 1
Input
3
Remote 2
Input
4
Remote 3
Input
5
Remote 4
Input
6
Remote 5
Input
7
Remote 6
Input
8
Remote 7
Input
9
Remote 8
Input
10
VO2/IO2 (20 mA); Ro<500 Ω
Output
11
VO1/IO1 (20 mA); Ro<500 Ω
Output
12
VO2 (Ro>5 kΩ)
Output
13
VO1 (Ro>5 kΩ)
Output
16
Digital
Input
17
Output of LIV1
Output
18
Output of LIV2
Output
19
Output of LIV3
Output
20
Output of LIV4
Output
21
Warning
Output
22
to pin10
to pin 11
23
24
25
Table 9.1 Bu2
Analogue
to pin 12
to pin 13
B-107
Output pin assignments
Analogue output
•
Pin 10 is only used if the connection board is fitted with the EM001 final stage module. This must be installed
as described in chapter 9.3.2. The switch position determines whether the output signal is made available as a
voltage signal or as a current signal.
Vo= 0...10 V, Ro >500 W
Io = 0...20 mA or +4...20 mA; Ro <500 W
•
Pin 11 is only used if the connection board is fitted with the EM001 final stage module. This must be installed
as described in chapter 9.3.2. The switch position determines whether the output signal is made available as a
voltage signal or as a current signal.
Vo=0...10 V, Ro≥500 W
Io=0...20 mA or +4...20 mA, Ro<500 W
NOTE
Connection boards AP08/14/17/18i may only be fitted with one final stage module. In this case pin 11 is
used and pin 10 is left free.
•
On pin 12 you will find analogue output signal VO2.
The connected load resistance must be greater than 5 kW.
•
On pin 13 you will find analogue output signal VO1 exactly as on the BNC female connector on the front panel.
Signals S1 to S4 are to be assigned as required to outputs V01 (Bu2 and BNC) and V02 (Bu2 only).
Bu2:
Ro >5 kW
BNC:
Ro >1 MW
B-108
•
On pins 17 to 20 you will find the connection states for limit switches 1 to 4. Their connection states are indicated by two different HCMOS voltage levels:
Positive logic:
Level 0V: Limit switch OFF
Level 5V: Limit switch ON
•
Pin 21 carries a level of 5 V (high level), which can be used as a warning signal. In the event of a fault − for example a break in the transducer cable − the output signal is set to 0 V (low). On the other hand, this signal is
also set to zero during the autocalibration cycle (every 5 min., for approx.1 s).
Remotes
On pins 2 to 9 of female connector 2 you will find remotes Ctrl 1 to 8 for controlling certain of the amplifier’s functions. These remotes are active if they have been enabled via an AB22A/AB32 display and control panel, i.e. in REMOTE operating mode. The tasks assigned to these remotes can be freely selected. The available functions are
shown in chapter F ”Additional functions” together with their descriptions.
In the factory preset, the remotes are not defined.
External triggering
Remote 7 is used as an external trigger input. For AP13i (Remote contact 7) see page B-49.
B-109
Additional notes on the AP17:
Pin assignment of the input socket
PIN
*)
Function
I/O
1
Shield
2
Zero-Index (+)
Input
3
Zero-Index (−)
Input
4
Ground
5
Supply voltage transducer −16 V (max. 500 mA) *)
Output
6
Supply voltage transducer +16 V (max. 500 mA) *)
Output
7
no function
8
Ground
9
SDA for the XM001 external memory module
Input
10
SLC for the XM001 external memory module
Output
11
Supply voltage transducer 5 V (max. 300 mA) *)
Output
12
F1+ rotation speed 0°, angle of rotation, torque, frequency
Input
13
F1− rotation speed 0°, angle of rotation, torque, frequency
Input
14
F2− rotation speed 90°, calibration signal trigger
Input/Output
15
F2+ rotation speed 90°, calibration signal trigger
Input/Output
The data on current indicates the maximum continuous currents which are permissible on the AP17. There is no restriction on the number
of connection boards per enclosure, but a maximum of four connection boards can be used for the transducer power supply (for instance
5 V/16 V for the T10F−SF1 torque flange).
B-110
When there are long cables (>100 m) and high frequencies (>200 kHz) it is necessary to switch on terminating
resistances. For this purpose the AP17 motherboard has a triple DIP switch S2, which must be switched to the
“ON” position.
AP17
ON
3
2
1
Switch S2
Component layout AP17
B-111
AP02
Relay contacts
Another possible option is to use RM001 relay modules in conjunction with the AP02 connection board (with or
without front panel). Depending how the relay modules are fitted to this connection board, they are available to
relay contacts Limit1/2 or Limit3/4. These signals are carried on 37-pin female connector Bu3 (see Table 9.2).
B-112
Function
PIN
1
20
37
19
Bu 3
1
Analogue
2
Digital
29
+10 V excitation pot. LV
20
−10 V excitation pot. LV
36
HCMOS Limit1
6
HCMOS Limit2
17
HCMOS Limit3
10
HCMOS Limit4
37
Central contact
7
Normally open contact
19
Normally closed contact
8
Central contact
18
Explanations about the table:
9
Control signal for relay modules
1 to 4: HCMOS Limit1...4
16
Central contact
11
15
12
Central contact
14
13
33
no function
32
no function
31
no function
30
no function
26
no function
25
no function
24
no function
23
no function
Table 9.2 Bu3
>5kΩ
Limit1
RM001
(BU404)
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
RM001
(BU403)
B-113
AP07/1
If you wish to take measurements with torque transducers in the T3..FN/FNA and T10F−KF1 series, you have
AP07/1 connection board available. The AP07/1 has only one female connector for torque.
Outputs torque, rotation speed, performance (scaled)
The pin assignment for female connectors MD, N and P (scaled) is shown in Table 9.3.
B-114
Function (MD, N, P scaled)
PIN
1
13
14
25
Female connector
MD, N, P scaled
1
Digital
2
Remote 1
3
Remote 2
4
Remote 3
5
Remote 4
6
Remote 5
7
Remote 6
8
Remote 7
9
Remote 8
10
Limit switch Limit1, normally open contact
11
Vo1= 10 V; Io1= 20 mA/+4...+20 mA
12
Voltage output Vo2 = 10 V; Ro>5 kΩ
13
14
Limit switch Limit1, normally closed contact
15
Limit switch Limit1, central contact
17
Limit switch 1; status
18
19
20
21
Warning
22
Limit switch Limit2, normally closed contact
23
Limit switch Limit2, normally open contact
24
Limit switch Limit2, central contact
25
Zero operating voltage, analogue
Table 9.3 Female connector MD, N, P
HCMOS 5 V logic
B-115
The outputs torque, rotation speed and scaled performance can only be fitted with one final stage module each.
The analogue output signal is carried on pin 11 if the final stage module is fitted. Sliding switches and DIP switches
are used to make the choice between voltage output and current output. The switch positions are described in
chapter 9.3.2. The relay contacts for limit switches Limit1 and Limit2 are available on pins 10, 14, 15 or 22, 23, 24
if the relay module is fitted. There is only provision for fitting with one relay module.
Output multiplier
The pin assignment for female connector P (unscaled) is shown in the table below. The analogue output signal is
carried on pin 11 if the final stage module is fitted. There is only provision for this option.
PIN
Function (P unscaled)
1−10,12,14−21
no function
11
Vo1 = 10 V; Io1 = 20 mA/+4...+20 mA
13
B-116
AP13i
Input assignments
(Pin-assignments for remote contact 1):
PLC
Output
Ground
(1)
(14)
External
AP13i
Remote contact
Associated ground
HBM
AP13i connection board makes remote contacts and limit switch
outputs, as well as the 24 V-level warning output, available for direct
connection to I/Os on programmable logic controllers.
Control I/Os are potential-segregated by optical coupler and arranged
in a number of groups, each with its own grounding system. These
groups are identified by shading in the AP13i connection diagram.
Functions of remote contacts shown between brackets refer to the
factory preset. You are free to allocate these functions to whichever
remote contacts you please.
In the case of the AP13i, the only available option is an EM001 final
stage module.
Output assignments
(Pin-assignments for output of LIV1):
CAUTION
Input
Ground
Power
supply
24V
Output of LIV
Ground
24V
0V
External
HBM
AP13i connection boards are specially adapted for ML30B or
ML50B/55B amplifiers. Please do not interchange these amplifier
types.
B-117
Pin assignment for the AP13i:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Remote contact 1
Remote contact 2
Ground (Remote contacts 3/4)
Remote contact 5
Remote contact 6
24V (Limit switch 1/2)
Ground (Limit switch 1/2)
24V (Limit switch 3/4, warning)
Ground (Limit switch 3/4, warning)
Current output Io1
Voltage output Vo2
Voltage output Vo1
Remote contact 3
Remote contact 4
Remote contact 7
Remote contact 8
Output of LIV1
Output of LIV2
Output of LIV3
Output of LIV4
Warning
Analogue earth
1
14
25
13
Bu 2
B-118
Remote contacts:
On the remote contacts the logic in relation to HCMOS levels is reversed in the case of the other connection
boards.
Function
Level 0 V
Level 24 V
ACAL
Autocal ON
Autocal OFF
TARE
taring starts on transition 0 V − 24 V
CPV1/2
Peak value 1/2 is stored
Peak value 1/2 is cleared from current value
HLD1/2
Peak value stores 1/2 not frozen
Contents of peak value stores 1/2 frozen
ZERO
Current measuring signal is set to zero on transition 0 V − 24 V
REMT
Remote control contacts inactive
SHNT
Shunt off
Shunt on
PRNT
When printing is enabled the channel is
taken into account
When printing is enabled the channel is not
taken into account
CAL
Remote control contacts active
Input is switched to internal calibration source
ZERO
Input is switched to zero signal
INV
Polarity is switched over (ML60B only)
PSEL1
PSEL2
PSEL3
PSEL4
REMT
Remote control outputs:
Function
Level 0 V
Level 24 V
Limit switches
Limit switches OFF
Limit switches ON
Warning
Device not ready or error (e.g. overflow)
No error
B-119
AP77
Profibus
1
5
The pin assignment of the 9-pin female D-Sub connector conforms to
the Profibus standard.
Pin
6
9
Function
1
−
2
−
3
RS485−B
4
RS485−RTS
5
GND
6
VCC
7
−
8
RS485−A
9
GND
You can find more information in the Operating Manual “MGCplus
Profibus Interface”.
B-120
9.3.2
Installing the EM001 final stage module
Output stage
module EM001
1
The EM001 final stage module can only be used with connection
boards without transducer recognition.
For correct positioning on the connection boards’ mother board the
EM001 final stage module has been marked with the numeral 1 on the
bottom left corner and a triangle on the left side. These symbols have
also been printed onto the mother board.
After having inserted the final stage module, you have to select the
switch and bridge positions according to the desired output signal (see
tables).
1
Mother board
B-121
AP07/1
The AP07/1 has slots for one EM001 final stage module and one
RM001 relay module.
Output stage module
EM001
The chart shows the arrangement on the motherboard. The final stage
module is assigned to a sliding switch and a DIP switch. The switch
position necessary for the output signal you require is shown in the
following table.
Relay module RM001*)
Output signal
1
DIP switches
1
10 V
2
2
*)
Switch
Output P has no slot for RM001
1
20 mA
2
1
+4...20 mA
2
B-122
AP08/14/17/18
These connection boards are all equipped with a slot for an EM001.
2
EM001
The accompanying chart shows the motherboard layout for the
AP08/17/18.
1
The accompanying chart shows the motherboard layout for the
AP14.
NOTE
1
EM001
2
Pay careful attention to the name (numbering) on the switch.
The deciding factor for the switch position in Table 9.4 is the numbering
on the switch and not its location.
B-123
This table shows the switch position necessary for the output signal you require.
Output signal
Switch
DIP switches
1
10 V
2
1
20 mA
2
1
+4...20 mA
2
Table 9.4: AP08/14/17/18
B-124
AP09
AP09 connection board can have two slots for final stage modules of
the EM001 type.
EM001
slot
EM001
slot
1
1
2
2
for
for
2
1
If these connection boards are ordered without final stage modules,
they are supplied without slots.
1
The accompanying chart shows the arrangement on the motherboards.
Each final stage module is assigned to a sliding switch and a DIP
switch. The switch position necessary for the output signal you require
is shown in the following table.
2
for
2
Output signal
Switch
for
1
1
10 V
2
1
20 mA
2
1
+4...20 mA
2
DIP switches
C-1
C
Commissioning
C-2
Commissioning Ý Switching on
1
C-3
Commissioning
This chapter shows you the necessary steps to take in order to make your measurement chain (amplifier system
and transducer) ready for use.
You will then be in a position to carry out a function test of all components. The various steps are deliberately explained in very general terms, without going into detail about specific transducers or amplifier plug-in modules.
However, it is very easy to apply the description to your own measurement chain. In some instances − especially to
do with connecting transducers − reference will be made to later chapters. We also warn about certain errors which
can typically occur during commissioning.
After initial commissioning and adapting the amplifier plug-in module to your transducer, you are in a position to get
to know the other functions and facilities of the MGCplus amplifier system.
•
•
•
•
Unpack the MGCplus.
Check that the MGCplus is undamaged.
Is the delivery complete?
Compare the contents of packages with the accompanying documentation list. Is the documentation complete?
C-4
1.1
Devices in the desktop housing and rack frame
•
If you have not yet received your complete amplifier system, you should take note of the following points when
putting the system together:
− The amplifier plug-in units are plugged in at the front panel and the associated connection boards are plugged
in at the back.
It is important to ensure correct allocation during this step:
− If using wide connection boards (8 divisions), you must plug these into slots 1, 3, 5 etc. Slots 2, 4, 6 etc. on the
front panel must be left free or with fitted blank plates.
• On safety grounds, all unused slots (amplifiers or connection boards) must be covered over with blank plates.
•
•
•
Check that all amplifiers and connection boards are firmly plugged in.
Connect the device to the mains supply with the mains cable provided.
Connect your transducer to the female connector provided on the connection board (reference BU01). If you
use a cable you have made up yourself, please adhere to the pin assignment for your transducer as shown in
chapter B.
Please note the safety instructions on page A-3.
C-5
•
Switch the device on with the POWER button on the front panel of
the device (in the case of the MGCCompact 2-channel housing,
there is a toggle switch on the back of the device).
When the AB22A/AB32 is initialized (at which time all LEDs light up
for a moment) it makes a note of the components that are present.
MGCplus Start-up
Switching on
If no transducer is connected, an overflow is displayed.
The opening display is followed in the standard version by a value display of the ”1 value” type (factory setting). Pressing the shift key
takes you to the set-up mode, in which you can configure the system,
the display, the amplifier and the additional functions.
MGC Compact
Back of the device NP05:
Switching on
C-6
We recommend that you set up the language first if you require a language other than German.
System
Display
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
Time
LANGUAGE
Language: Deutsch↓
Deutsch
English
Francais
Amplifier
Options
D-1
D
Functions and symbols on the AB22A/AB32
D-2
MGCplus with AB22A / AB32
D-3
Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Control elements
1
Control elements
1.1
AB22A control elements
All settings on your device are carried out with the keys on the AB22A/AB32 display and control panel. Using the
shift key (SET) you can select the ”Measure” or ”Set-up” operating modes.
Function keys F1...F4
Effective in measurement
mode and set-up mode
Delete key
Clears the last entries to input
fields
Help key
Activates online help texts for
certain functions
Cancel (Escape) key
Resets last entry in menus
and selection fields; closes
help texts
Alphanumeric
keypad
For entering numbers, letters
or special characters into the
Power switch
edit fields
Display
Channel selection keys
Selecting the active channel
Shift key
Switches between measuring mode
and set-up mode.
Cursor keys
Measuring mode:
Cursor control
Set-up mode:
Moving through the menu
Confirmation key
Activates the settings that have
been entered
D-4
Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Control elements
1.2
AB32 control elements
Display
Channel selection keys
Selecting the active channel
Power switch
Help key
Activates online help for
the active functions.
Function keys
Effective in measurement
mode and set-up mode;
freely assignable for
measuring mode
Shift key
Switches between
measuring mode
and set-up mode.
Delete key
Clears the entire
entry in edit fields
Confirmation key
Activates the settings that have
been entered
Alphanumeric
keypad
For entering numbers,
letters or special
characters into the edit
fields in the display
Cursor keys
Measuring
mode:
Set-up mode:
Select signal (Gross, Net,
Peak values)
Selecting display mode
(one or multi-channel)
Moving through the
selection and set-up
menus
Cancel (Escape) key
Resets the last entry in menus or
selection fields and closes help texts.
D-5
Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Display
2
Display
2.1
The first display
MGCplus Start-up
When the power is switched on, a progressively moving horizontal bar
is displayed to indicate that the device is initialising.
The opening display is followed in the standard version by a value
display of the ”1 value” type (factory setting). Pressing the shift key
takes you to the set-up mode, in which you can configure the system,
the display, the amplifier and the additional functions. We recommend
that you set up the language first if you require a language other than
German.
D-6
2.2
Display in measuring mode
Display for ”1 value” type
The chapter called ”Display” deals fully with setting up the various screen types. The following section gives you an
overview of the factory preset display types.
Channel name
(freely definable)
Output signal
Gross
Net
Peak values
Limit switches
Gross
B
Channel
Status line
Function keys
(in this example, in measuring
mode, 1st level)
Status
limit switch
Measure
Measure
Measurement value
Unit
Number of the
selected channel
(maximum 16 or
16.8 in the case
of multi-channel
modules)
D-7
Display with ”3 values” type
Gross
Gross
Use
to go to the next type
Gross
Measure
Gross
Gross
Gross
Gross
Gross
Gross
Display for ”6 values” type
Use
Measure
1−ML55B
Gross
Display for ”YT-Diagram” type
Use
Measure
1−ML55B
1−ML55B
Gross
Gross
Display for ”XY-Diagram” type
Use
Measure
Limit switches
1−Limit1
1−Limit2
1−Limit3
1−Limit4
Display for ”Status limit switch” type
LIV−On
LIV−Off
LIV−On
LIV−Off
Use
Measure
DATA ACQUISITION
SAMPLERATE: 50Hz
PERIODS: 100
TIME: 00: 00: 00
Use
1
−4.0S
16.0S
FILE NAME: MGCP0000.MEA
Get DAQ1
Display for ”Data acquisition” type
120 MB FREE
Acal
D-8
Symbols in the display
The status line tells you about the status of a measuring device at that instant:
Gross
B
Channel
Measure
Status line
Measure
Measure,
Zero,
Calibrate
Acal
Amplifier input status
Status display of parameter set memory
Numbers 1...8 Number of the current parameter set
S
Factory setting
X
User-defined set-up; displayed when a parameter set has been modified
/
Read next/previous parameter set
Acal
Automatic calibration on (function ”Acal”)
Computer interface is active
Data transmission over link
D-9
Status of limit switches. If the On level that has been set for a limit switch is exceeded, the number
of the switch concerned is underlined in black in the display.
Example: On level of limit switch 1 is exceeded
Local
Remote off
Remote
Remote on
Channel
Channel number of a one-channel module
1
Channel
3.2
Channel number of a multi-channel module
Number of the sub-channel
Slot number in the system enclosure
D-10
2.3
Messages on the AB22A/AB32
The following messages may be displayed on devices fitted with a CP42 communications processor:
Message in the display
Cause
Remedy
CP42 hard disk full!
The capacity of the PCMCIA hard disk has been
exceeded.
Install a new hard disk or delete data.
Error configuring channels x, y, z!
a) The measuring amplifier types x, y,
z do not agree with the types in the
configuration file (modules
changed).
Check the equipment of the MGCplus device.
b) There is no amplifier plug-in module
present.
The following channels have been
configured: x, y, z
Information about a successful configuration of
channels x, y, z
−
Wrong hard disk!
The PCMCIA hard disk contains a file (Ident.txt)
in which the Serial No. of a CP42 is stored. This
Serial No. does not match the Serial No. of the
existing CP42.
Check the assignment of the CP42 hard disk, and
if necessary delete file Ident.txt (see also
Operating Manual “MGCplus Assistant; CP42
serial number”).
Overflow
The measuring range has been exceeded
(Gross, Net or both).
a) Check the values in the zero buffer
and/or tare buffer.
(In status mode the red
“ERROR/WARN.” LED lights up on
the front panel of the amplifier plug-in
module).
Calibration error
(In status mode the red
“ERROR/WARN.” LED lights up on
the front panel of the amplifier plug-in
module).
b) Carry out taring or a zero balance.
c) Increase the measuring range.
a) No feedback circuits connected and
Autocal has been triggered.
a) Check the transducer connection,
then trigger autocalibration.
b) Connection board has been
changed.
b) Carry out a set-up.
c) RAM/EEPROM error
d) Check the transducer settings
(transducer type, excitation voltage,
output characteristics).
d) Calibration curve not in order
c) Carry out a set-up.
(In status mode, the red “ERROR/WARN.” LED on the front panel of the amplifier module lights up)
D-11
Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Ý Set-up mode
3
AB22A/AB32 in set-up mode
The set-ups for the MGCplus unit are subdivided into groups according to their function. Pressing the shift key
takes you to the set-up dialogue. Ihe selection bar and the number of the channel, the settings will have an effect
on, is displayed.
Display in set-up mode
Settings for channel:
System
Display
System
Display
System-specific
settings that in most
cases are only
carried out during the
initial start-up or for a
new measurement
task.
User-defined display
settings such as the
required method of
representing values,
function key
assignment, or the
specification of
channel names.
3.2 ...
Amplifier
Options
Amplifier
Options
Selection bar
Amplifier set-ups for
Additional set-ups for
each channel, taking each individual
into account such
amplifier.
things as transducer
type, amplifier plug-in
module or
conditioning.
D-12
Switch to the set-up dialogue by pressing the shift key
. The lower part of the display is a selection bar showing
the topics to which the function keys immediately below them (F1...F4) are assigned (selection level 1).
You can set up your unit in various menus which you call up from the selection bar in the display. Depending on the
function, you can call up to 4 menu levels (selection and setup levels). In the first two levels you select topics; you
are in the selection levels. In the next levels you set up certain values or switch functions on/off. You are then in
the setup levels.
Example: Setting up a system password
Selection level 1
Selection level 2
Password
Password
System
Display
Selection bar
Save/Load
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
System
Pop-up menu
Setup level 1
Password
new
User:
Display
Amp Password:
Access:
Set-up window
System
delete
Setup level 2
chang
Add
e user
set
User:
Display
Amp Password:
Access:
Set-up window
Operator
OK
Cancel
D-13
3.1
Press the shift key
Calling up menus
. At first only the selection bar is displayed. If you now press one of the function keys
F1...F4, the corresponding pull-up menu appears above the topic concerned (in this example ”System”). Move the
bright bar through the pull-up menu with the cursor keys
to the required topic (in this case ”Language”) and
press the confirmation key
. You are now in the setup level for the selected topic. The current setup window can
take you to other setup levels.
Selection level 1
Selection bar
Selection level 2
Pull-up menu
Setup level 1
Selection window
System
Display
Password
Save/Load
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
Time
English↓
Amplifier
Options
Bright bar
Deutsch
English
English
Francais
D-14
3.2
Quitting menus
If you want to quit a menu level, press the shift key
Result: You return to measuring mode
or one of the function keys F1...F4
Result: You return to selection level 2
or (if present) the key symbol
Cancel
or
Result: You return to the previous menu level
OK
Measuring mode
1−ML30B
Gross
Channel
Selection level 1
Selection level 2
System
Password
Displa Password
Save/Load
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
System
Setup level 1
Password
Displa User:
Password:
Access:
System
....
new
....
change
....
set
Add user
Displa
delete
Setup level 2
User:
....
Password:
....
Access:
Operator
OK
Before quitting a menu widow and returning to measuring mode, you
are still able to save or clear the set-ups you have entered, or cancel
your intention to quit the dialogue window. A security prompt is therefore displayed alongside.
Save set-up?
Yes
No
Cancel
Cancel
In this case the factory preset is ”Yes”. Confirm with
.
D-15
3.3
Channel selection in measuring mode
There are two ways in which you can select a channel in measuring mode:
1. By using the channel selection keys
.
2. By directly inputting the channel number using the alphanumeric keypad (recommended for multi-channel
modules).
Here are two examples of method 2:
Example 1: Selecting a channel on a one-channel module
•
Press the numeric key for the desired channel (for example 7)
•
The indicator then displays the channel text box showing the channel number requested:
Channel 7
•
Confirm with
.
Example 2: Selecting a sub-channel on a multi-channel module
•
Press the numeric key for the required slot (for example 3)
•
The indicator then displays the channel text box showing the slot number requested:
Channel 3
(If you then use
•
to confirm, the first sub-channel is automatically selected, which in this case is 3.1).
Type in a point and then the required sub-channel number:
Channel 3.2
•
Confirm with
.
D-16
3.4
Channel selection in set-up mode
In most of the set-up windows on the AB22A/AB32, the column header shows the name of the currently selected
set-up menu and the channel selected.
Channel text box
CHANNEL NAME
Channel
Channel name:
3.2
2−ML55B
There are two ways in which you can select a channel in set-up mode:
1. By using the channel selection keys
(select the channels one after another).
2. By entering the channel number in the channel text box. You have the option to skip directly from one channel
to any other channel of your choice.
•
Press the cursor key
•
Type in the required channel number (for instance 3.2 in the case of a multi-channel module).
•
Confirm with
.
, to go to the channel text box in the column header.
D-17
3.5
Saving the set-ups
All settings that you enter before the security prompt are temporarily stored in working memory (RAM) as soon as
. The data are permanently saved as soon as you quit set-up
you make an amendment and confirm it with
mode and confirm the security prompt with ”Yes”.
Amplifier
Volatile memory (8h)
RAM
Factory
settings
EPROM
save
load
EEPROM
Permanent save
parameter set 1...8
D-18
3.6
Selection menus
Example:
Password
Save/Load
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
You select topics from the first two selection levels. You do this in the first level (menu bar) by
pressing the corresponding function keys, and in the second level by selecting from pop-up
menus.
•
Select and confirm in selection fields (pull-up menu)
The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm the selection with
Time
D-19
3.7
Elements in the set-up window
At set-up level you enter the parameters via set-up windows. The set-up windows contain dialogue boxes, of
which there can be vier different types.
SETUP WINDOW
Activation fields
Dialogue boxes
•
Selection field
1V
Excitation 2.5V
5V
Abs
Gross
Net
Edit field
User:
Button
Cancel
Switching on or off in activation fields
Example:
Abs
Gross
Net
The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm the selection with
. A tick appears in the selected box
(”activated”). Pressing the confirmation key again cancels the activated status.
Channel-related activation fields
Example:
SELECT SIGNALS FOR PRINTOUT
OK
Cancel
All channels
All signals
Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
LIV-Status
D-20
Multi-channel modules are identified by two points below the channel number (channel 8 in the example). If you
to enable it, a new set-up window opens with
select the activation field for a multi-channel module and use
activation fields for the various sub-channels.
Example:
SELECT SIGNALS FOR PRINTOUT
OK
Cancel
All channels
All signals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ..
8 9 10111213141516
Channel
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
LIV-Status
•
1 2 3 45 6 78
8.
All
OK
Cancel
Opening and selecting from selection fields
Example:
Excitation:
5V↓
Excitation:
1V
2.5V
5V
The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. When you press the confirmation key
to select your set-up and confirm with
Use the cursor keys
such fields are identified with a downward pointing arrow↓ .
the selection field opens.
. In the documentation (but not in the display)
NOTE
Doubleclick
to edit the “Unit” selection field in the “Transducer” set−up window. Then, you can enter
up to four characters (e.g. min−1, with −1 representing an individual character assigned to the button
).
D-21
w
Edit fields
You may input numbers or letters in the edit fields. In certain edit fields you can only enter numbers (e.g. Zero
value), since it would serve no purpose to enter letters in such cases.
Example:
a) Edit field without contents
User:
The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm your input with
Example:
b) Edit field with contents
An edit field with contents can be
Zero point:
.
0.000
− directly overwritten
− partially edited
− completely deleted with the clear key
.
Inputting numbers and letters
The keys in the alphanumeric input field are assigned seven ways: 1 number, 3 capital letters, 3 small letters. On
the first keystroke a number is displayed; further keystrokes produce letters.
When entering letters one after another that are located on the same key, you must press the cursor key
.
For example: entering the letters ”FE”:
Step 1
Step 2
4x
The minus sign on the
Step 3
1x
3x
key can also be used as a separator in text boxes.
D-22
The special characters °, W, m have been assigned to button
, in addition.
The superscript numerals 2, 3, and the special character @ have been assigned to button
The superscript numeral −1 has been assigned to button
w
, in addition.
, in addition.
Buttons
Example:
Cancel
or
change...
The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm with
. The button label is followed by three dots
(change...) and a new set-up window is displayed when confirmation is given.
E-1
E
Measure
E-2
Measure ➝ General Notes
1
E-3
General notes
This chapter shows you the steps involved in taking a measurement with the MGCplus. At the beginning of each
section an example explains the details specific to each transducer with regard to adapting the amplifier plug-in
modules. Once the amplifier plug-in modules are matched you can proceed with taking measurements. For
information on other functions such as limit switches or peak value stores, see chapter F ”Additional functions”.
Steps in setting up the measurement chain
1
Settings specific to the transducer: bridge type, excitation voltage, sensitivity, k-factor.
2
Settings for conditioning: zero balance, zero offset, tare value, filter settings.
3
Settings specific to the display: unit, decimal places, scale range, step.
4
Settings for analogue output: gross, net, peak value, output characteristics.
You can set up the zero point and measuring range in two ways, depending on the requirement:
a) by inputting the given transducer characteristics
b) by calibration with direct loading
E-4
Measure Ý Setting up the amplifier
2
Basic measurement channel set-up
The ”Amplifier” pull-up menu is adapted to the signal flow of a measurement chain and is used to balance the
whole system.
Basic unit
(e.g. mV/V)
Transducer
Analogue output
Amplifier
(V)
Display
(User-specific unit
e.g. kg)
The following basic steps are needed to set up a measurement channel:
1. Select set-up mode with shift key
TRANSDUCER
CHANNEL1
Type
SG full bridge
5V↓
Excitation
kg ↓
Unit:
mV/V
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
Zero pt:
2.0000 ...
Nom. val.: 50.0000 ...
measure...
K-Factor:
3
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
.
2. If necessary: Set up the language you want for the menus in
the system set-up (see chapter H; System → Language)
3. Settings specific to the transducer:
’Bridge type and excitation voltage
measure
’Unit
’Characteristics (zero point and nominal value)
4. Adjust amplifier
Having carried out these steps you will have completed the most
essential settings and adjustments, and will be able to carry out
simple measurements. The following steps are optional.
E-5
CONDITIONING
CHANNEL1
0.0000 ... V
Zero reference:
−>0<−
0.0000 ... V
Zero offset:
−>T<−
0.0000 ... V
Tare:
Disable zeroing: 3
Disable taring: 3
Bessel ↓V
Low pass 100 ↓
Hz
High pass Off ↓
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
kg ↓
Unit
Decimal places 3 ...
Display range
from −50.000 kg
50.000 kg
to
Step
1↓
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
CHANNEL1
Output Vo1: Gross ↓
Output Vo2: Net ↓
Output characteristics ppm
V
Point 1: 0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
Point 2: 100.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
5. Settings for conditioning:
’Zero balance (zero offset)
’Tare
’Filter
6. Setting up the display format
’Unit
’Decimal places
’Display range
’Step
7. Setting up analogue outputs
’Gross/Net/Peak value
’Output characteristics
8. Setting up additional functions (if necessary)
’Limit switches, Peak values
’Remote contacts, ...
E-6
2.1
Adaptation to the transducer
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
5V↓
kg ↓
mV/V
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
2.0000 ...
3
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
Type
Selection field for the transducer types which can be attached. The
selection depends on the type of amplifier and connection board.
SG full bridge
measure...
K-Factor:
CHANNEL1
measure
Excitation
Selection field for available excitation voltages (not available with all
amplifier types). The selection depends on the type of amplifier and
connection board. You will find more hints in later chapters.
Unit
Selection field for the physical unit. The basic unit mV/V cannot be
changed.
Zero pt.
Edit field for entering the zero point. The lefthand field refers to the
physical unit and the righthand field to the basic unit. By activating the
button labelled measure you can measure the current zero signal. The
value in mV/V is then displayed in the righthand edit field.
Nom.val.
Edit fields for the nominal value. The lefthand field refers to the physical
unit and the righthand field to the basic unit (you can find this nominal
value on the identification plate for the transducer).
measure...
Button for opening the ”Two point calibration” set-up window, in which
you can measure the characteristic points 1 and 2.
Adjust amplifier
Button for matching the amplifier to the inputs of zero point and nominal
value.
E-7
2.1.1
Extended functions of the ML38B
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom. val.:
CHANNEL1
SG full bridge
Ex.Ftn...
5V↓
kg ↓
mV/V
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
2.0000 ...
measure...
Nominal value
Enter the rated value. The value can be found in the table for linear interpolation comparison (in the calibration certificate); if this is not available, enter the value for the maximum calibration stage with the corresponding arithmetic mean in electric units.
measure
Adjust amplifier
NOTE
0.0000 ...
K−factor:
These values used for the rated value must not be changed after
entering the coefficient of the polynomial curve!
Polynomial curve
Ex. Ftn...
Active
Standardized
Coeffizients
A0:
A1:
A2:
A3:
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
OK
C0:
C1:
C2:
C3:
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
Aktive
Press the confirm key to activate the curve (a checkmark will appear in
the activate field)
Cancel
Coefficients/Standardized
The cubic polynomial curve is used to correct the signal of the transducer (in mV/V). The measured values are thereby adapted to the actual curve of the transducers. To do this, enter the coefficients A0, A1,
A2 and A3 of the third order polynomial, which is described by the following equation:
YPh = A3Yel3 + A2Yel2 + A1Yel + A0
YPh: Display in physical units with polynomial curve
Yel: Measured value in electric units
The coefficient values can be found in the transducer calibration certificate.
E-8
The amplifier itself requires standardized coefficients (C0−C3) for
value 1, the coefficients from the calibration certificate (A0−A3) are automatically converted before being transferred to the amplifier (also in
the MGCplus assistant).
Conversion: C A Rated value electrical unit (right input field)
Rated value physical unit (left input field)
Example: Enter the coefficients from a Force DKD calibration certificate from HBM.
The following equivalencies apply:
DKD calibration certificate
Polynomial equation
T
A1
S
A2
R
A3
ATTENTION
During calibration, the measured values must be entered as the
electric unit (mV/V) without changing the read-out!
E-9
2.2
TEDS transducer
F-keys-level 1
1−ML30B
Gross
Channel
measure
−> 0 <−
−> T <−
−II−
F-keys-level 2
Acal
TEDS
Unit
...
TEDS (Transducer Electronic Data Sheet) is the designation for an
electronic data sheet in the transducer. It is stored in an electronic module that is inseparably connected to the transducer. It can be located
in the transducer housing, in the inseparable cable or connector plug.
Many components in the MGCplus amplifier system are capable of reading the transducer information stored in the data sheet and to convert
it into amplifier settings so that measurements can be started immediately.
MGCplus supports TEDS-transducers that comply with the data protocol (One-Wire-Protocol) and data structure in the IEEE 1451.4 standard.
This means that the same cables can be used as for transducers that
do not have TEDS.
Some MGCplus system connection plates, e.g. AP01i, also offer the
possibility of inputting TEDS data signals to two separate pins (ground
and TEDs data signal).
Loading TEDS data into the amplifier
In the default setting, the TEDS key F2 is in level 2 of the function keys.
1. Press it in measuring mode
2. Press the TEDS-key
.
.
The actual amplifier will then be parameterised with the transducer settings from the TEDS chip if it supports this functionality.
E-10
TEDS supports the following combinations of single-channel amplifiers with corresponding connection plates as per
IEEE 1451.4. All single-channel amplifier MLxxB are suitable for TEDS, however they must be equipped with up to
date firmware. This firmware and the corresponding firmware download program can be downloaded free of charge
from the HBM homepage (www.hbm.com/support/downloads).
ML01B
ML10B
TEDS
ML50B
ML55B
ML55BS6
ML60B
ϑ
nR
ϑ
1,4,5,B1
1,4,5,B1
AP03i
ML38B
1,4,5,B1
TEDS
ML35B
nR
1,4,5,B1
AP01i
ML30B
T3...T10
AP07/1
min−1
T4WA
AP08
AP09
TEDS
min−1
T4WA
nR
ϑ
1,4,5,B1
1,4,5,B1
AP13i
ϑ
1,4,5,B1
TEDS
1,4,5,B1
AP12
T3...T10
nR
T3...T10
ϑ
1,4,5,B1
1,4,5,B1
AP11i
nR
AP14
TEDS
AP17
AP18i
T10F(S)
E-11
The following amplifier – connection plate combinations are TEDS capable for multi-channel amplifiers.
ML801B
ML455
ML460
TEDS
AP401
AP402i (1)
TEDS
TEDS
TEDS
AP409
AP418i
AP455i
AP455iS6
AP460i
AP801
AP801S6
TEDS
TEDS TEDS
AP809
AP810i (2)
AP814Bi
AP815i
TEDS
AP835
AP836i (2)
(1)
(2)
available from December 2005
available from October 2005
E-12
Legends
Voltage
SG (resistance)-half bridge
Current
SG (resistance)-quarter bridge
Passive piezo-electric transducer
Inductive half bridge
Current-fed piezo-electric
transducer
Pulse counter/frequency
T3...T10
Torque/speed
T3..., T10
Potentiometer
200Ω − 5000Ω
1,4,5,B1
Torque
T1, T4, T5, TB1
LVDT
Inductive full bridge
nR
ϑ
SG (resistance)-full bridge
Piezoresistive transducer
Thermo-resistors
PT100, PT 1000
Thermocouples
min−1
T4WA
T4WA speed
E-13
2.3
CONDITIONING
Signal conditioning
CHANNEL1
0.0000 ... V
Zero reference:
−>0<−
0.0000 ... V
Zero offset:
−>T<−
0.0000 ... V
Tare:
3
Disable zeroing:
Disable taring: 3
Bessel ↓V
Low pass 100 ↓
Hz
High pass Off ↓
Zero reference
Amount by which the relative zero point is offset in relation to the
absolute zero.
Example: A displacement transducer (nominal displacement ±20 mm)
is intended to be measured from an engine seating and is fastened at a
height of 1 m above. The display is intended to show the displacement
as an absolute value.
Displacement transducer
±20mm
CONDITIONING
Relative zero point
CHANNEL1
1000.00 mm
Zero reference:
0.0000 ... mm −>0<−
Zero offset:
0.0000 ... mm −>T<−
Tare:
Disable zeroing: 3
Disable taring: 3
Bessel ↓V
Low pass 100 ↓
Hz
High pass Off ↓
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Zero reference=1000mm
Absolute zero point
Engine seating
Zero offset
By activating the button labelled −>0<− you trigger zero balancing. If
the value of the zero offset is known, you can input it directly in the edit
field. Zero balancing affects how the gross value is displayed.
Tare
By activating the button labelled −>T<− you trigger taring. If the tare
value is known, you can input it directly in the edit field. Taring affects
how the gross value is displayed.
E-14
Disable zero/Disable tare
You can disable Zero Balance and/or Taring. Disabling applies to all
triggering mechanisms (F-keys, remote contacts, software).
The following brief example will make clear the difference between zero
balancing and taring:
Container
Platform
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Load cells
Action
Platform
55 kg
−>0<−
Container
6 kg
Component 1
7 kg
Component 2
8 kg
−>0<−
−>T<−
−
A platform which stands on three load cells is to be used for weighing a
container. Two different components are tipped into the container one
after the other, and the weight of each is to be displayed (net).
The table shows the status before and after zero balancing and taring
are triggered.
Set-up window
Display
Zero offset
Tare
55 kg
0
61 kg
61 kg
61 kg
0
7 kg
15 kg
Gross
Net
before 55 kg
before 55 kg
after 0 kg
after 0 kg
before 6 kg
before 6 kg
after 0 kg
after 0 kg
before 7 kg
before 7 kg
after 7 kg
after 0 kg
15 kg (total contents of
container)
8 kg (component 2
only)
E-15
Impulse response
Low pass
Low-pass filters are used to suppress unwanted high-frequency
interference above a defined cut-off frequency.
Amplitude response, phase delay and impulse response are dependent
on the filter characteristics. You can choose between the Butterworth
characteristic and the Bessel characteristic.
Impulse response
The Butterworth characteristic exhibits a linear amplitude response
which then falls away steeply above the cut-off frequency. There is an
overshoot of approx. 10 %.
The Bessel characteristic exhibits an impulse response with very little
(<1 %) or no overshooting. The amplitude response falls away less
steeply.
High pass
High-pass filters are used to suppress unwanted low-frequency
interference below a defined cut-off frequency. You can use high-pass
to suppress slow fluctuations such as those due to the influence of
temperature and drift over time.
The high-pass filter has no function when connected to resistance
thermometers and thermocouples.
NOTE
In order for high-pass to function, the low-pass setting must not
fall below the following limits:
Bessel:
≥5 Hz
Butterworth:
≥10 Hz
E-16
2.4
Display
Unit3
System
Display
DISPLAY
Amplifier
Options
CHANNEL1
V↓
3 Abs
Unit
Display range
from −10.000 V
10.000 V
to
Step
100 ↓
Selecting the required unit for the display. You may choose between the
basic unit (mV/V), the user-specific unit (e.g. kg) and the unit for
analogue output (V). The associated measured value is then displayed.
You can achieve the same effect with the function ”Unit” (factory
settings: F3/level 2; see also page G-23).
Abs
If the absolute display is activated ( 3 ), the display shows the signal at
the amplifier input without any conditioning (such as zero offset or
taring).
Decimal places
Number of decimal places.
Display range
Display range in the selected unit (automatically displayed).
Step
The step defines the size of the display increments. It refers to the last
decimal place in the nominal value.
Example: Nominal value 20 kg
Decimal places 1 (20.0 kg)
Step 1 means the display is in steps of 100 g
Decimal places 3 (20.000 kg)
E-17
2.5
Analogue outputs (one-channel modules only)
Output VO1
Select signal for analogue output 1 (BNC female connector front panel).
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Output VO2
Select signal for analogue output 2 (female connector Bu2 back of the
device).
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
CHANNEL1
Output Vo2: Net ↓
V
Point 1: 0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
Point 2: 100.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
Output characteristics
The edit fields for calibration points 1 and 2 are automatically updated
as soon as you go to the ”Transducer” input window and activate the
. However, you can also change the
button labelled Adjust amplifier
characteristics of the analogue output by direct input.
User-specific unit
(e.g. ppm)
Pnt.2
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
OFF
Pnt.1
Analogue output (V)
E-18
Example: Minimum set-up for first measurement
System
Display
Amplifier
The transducer is a load cell with the following nominal data:
Options
Nominal load 50 kg
Nominal sensitivity 2 mV/V
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys
by directly inputting the channel you want (see D-15).
, use the cursor keys
3. Press the function key
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
K-Factor:
”Transducer” and confirm with
5V↓
kg ↓
4. Use the cursor keys
mV/V
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
2.0000 ...
3
to select
CHANNEL1
SG full bridge
measure...
or
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
measure
confirm with
.
to select ”Strain gage full bridge” and
.
5. Use
to go to the ”Excitation” selection field, press
select 5V.
6. Confirm with
7. Use
.
to go to the ”Unit” selection field. Press
”kg” and confirm with
8. Use
. Select the unit
.
to go to the ”Zero pt.” edit field and enter the value ”0” in
the lefthand edit field. Confirm with
and
.
E-19
9. Unload the load cell.
System
Display
Amplifier
10. Use
to go to the button labelled measure... and confirm with
(the measured value is displayed in the righthand edit field of ”Zero
pt.”)
Options
11. Use
Confirm with
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
12. Use
.
to go to the righthand edit field (column mV/V) and enter
the value ”2”. Confirm with
13. Use
with
TRANSDUCER
to go to the ”Nom.val.” edit field and enter the value ”50”.
.
to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
.
CHANNEL1
14. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
and confirm
SG full bridge
the security prompt with
5V↓
kg ↓
0.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
2.0000 ...
3
.
mV/V
0.0000 ...
measure...
K-Factor:
and confirm
measure
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
E-20
Measure Ý Adaptation to the transducer
3
Adaptation to the transducer
3.1
SG transducer
SG transducers (HBM load cells, force transducers) are passive transducers with the following characteristics:
•
•
•
they must be fed with an excitation voltage (carrier frequency or DC voltage)
they are SG full bridges
The transducer has the following characteristic data:
− Nominal load (e.g. 20kg)
− Nominal sensitivity (e.g. 2mV/V)
These values must be taken into account during adaptation to the amplifier.
The standard set-up for excitation voltage UB in the case of an SG full bridge is 5V. If higher measuring ranges are
required or if several transducers are connected in parallel, a lower excitation voltage must me selected. The individual values depend on the type of plug-in module used.
Amplifier
Limits of the measuring range (mV/V)
UB=5 V
UB=2.5 V
UB=1 V
ML10B
± 0.2...6.12
± 0.4...12.24
± 1.0...30.6
ML30B
± 0.1...3.06
± 0.2...6.12
± 0.5...15.3
ML38B
± 0.2...5.1
± 0.4...10.2
−
ML55B
± 0.1...3.06
± 0.2...6.12
± 0.5...15.3
With these measuring range limits, a voltage of 1 V to 10 V can be generated at the analogue output, depending on
the setting.
NOTE
The specified full scale values are peak values and cannot be affected by adjusting the analogue output
settings.
E-21
3.1.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics
The following example explains the settings:
Load cell with the following characteristics: nominal load 20 kg,
excitation voltage 5 V, nominal sensitivity 2 mV/V
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
Measurement is to be to a maximum of 10 kg, i.e. the display range for
the amplifier is ±10.00 kg (displayed to 2 decimal places). A value of
10 V is to be generated at the analogue output for a 10 kg load.
by directly inputting the channel you want (for example 3.2
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
.
SG full bridge
5V↓
kg ↓
0.0000 ...
20.0000 ...
3
4. Select ”Transducer” from the pull-up menu and confirm with
mV/V
0.0000 ...
measure...
K-Factor:
CHANNEL1
).
TRANSDUCER
or
2.0000 ...
.
measure
5. Use
to select ”SG full bridge” and confirm with
.
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
6. Use
select 5V.
7. Confirm with
8. Use
.
to switch to the ”Unit” selection field and press
the unit ”kg” and confirm with
9. Use
and
. Select
.
.
E-22
10. Unload the load cell.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
11. Use
to go to the button labelled measure and confirm with
pt.”)
12. Enter the value ”20” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field.
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
13. Enter the value ”2” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field (below the
unit mV/V).
14. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
. If you wish to make no further changes to the display
and output characteristics, you may continue with point 24. .
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
kg ↓
Unit
Display range
from −20.000 kg
20.000 kg
to
Step
1↓
15. Use
to return to the pull-up menu.
16. Select ”Display” from the pull-up menu and confirm with
.
17. Specify the required number of decimal places in the ”Decimal
places” edit field and confirm with
.
18. Select the value ”2” from the ”Step*)” selection field and confirm with
.
NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range.
Example: Input 10.0 kg
→ Step 1 means the display is in steps of 100 g
Input 10.000 kg
E-23
19. Use
20. Select ”Analogue outputs” from the pull-up menu and confirm with
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
.
21. Select the required signal from the ”Output Vo1” selection field and
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
CHANNEL1
Output Vo2: Net ↓
Output characteristics kg
V
Point 1: 0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
Point 2: 10.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
confirm with
.
confirm with
.
23. Use
to go to the ”Output characteristics Point 2” edit field, and
enter the required value (left for the display, right for the analogue
output). Confirm with
.
and confirm
.
E-24
3.1.2 Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer
By transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a
defined loading occurs.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Example:
A 4 kg calibration weight is used for calibrating a 10 kg load cell.
NOTE
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
If zero point and nominal value are not modified (for instance in
the case of recalibration), you may omit points 1−10.
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
).
SG full bridge
5V↓
kg ↓
mV/V
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
2.0000 ...
measure...
K-Factor:
CHANNEL1
or
measure
3. Press
.
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
3
5. Use
Two point calibration
kg
mV/V
1st pt.:
0.0000
0.0021
Measure
2nd pt.:
4.0000
0.8032
Measure
OK
Cancel
Shunt off
to select ”SG full bridge” and confirm with
8. Use
and
.
the unit ”kg” and confirm with
.
6. Use
select 5 V.
7. Confirm with
.
.
. Select
E-25
9. Use
10. Use
to go to the ”Nom.val.” edit field and enter the value ”10” in
11. Use
with
.
.
and confirm
Adjust amplifier
.
and confirm with
measure...
.
13. Unload the transducer.
14. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field of calibration
1st pt. and confirm with
15. Use cursor key
pt.” line and confirm with
16. Use cursor key
.
Measure
in the ”1st
.
to select the lefthand edit field from the ”2nd pt.”
line, enter the value ”4” and confirm with
.
17. Load the transducer with the 4kg calibration weight.
18. Use cursor key
to select key symbol
Measure
from the ”2nd pt.”
line. If you now press
measurement starts, and the current
measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside the
Measure button.
E-26
19. Use cursor key
to select the ”OK” button and confirm with
(the amplifier converts the nominal value to 10kg; the calibration
data for 4kg stays unchanged).
.
and confirm
E-27
Measure Ý Strain gages
3.2
Strain gages
The variable to which reference is to be made for assessment of the material loading is the mechanical stress to
which the material is exposed. A practical method for experimental determination of material stresses is based on
strain gages. A detailed description of the strain gage technique may be found in the book ”An Introduction to the
Technique of Measuring with Strain Gauges” (Author: Karl Hoffmann, published by HBM Darmstadt).
The resistance of the SG is changed by straining. This change lies in the mW and mW range, which is why the
Wheatstone bridge is used for measuring with great accuracy.
e1
UA
k e
4
UB
e4
UB
UB = bridge excitation voltage
e2
e3
UA
UA = bridge output voltage
ML10B
ML30B
ML55B
UA
relative change of excitation voltage
UB
total strain
e = e1−e2+e3−e4
k = gage sensitivity (k-factor)
Fig.3.1:
Wheatstone bridge
E-28
With the MGCplus measurement system you can measure the strain of one strain gage or the total strain of several
strain gages. The possible bridge circuits and the necessary device configuration are combined in the following
table:
bridge type
Number of
active SGs
total strain
Connection board
Amplifier
Quarter bridge
1
e
AP14
ML10B, ML30B, ML55B
2
e = e1−e2
AP01i, AP03i, AP11i,
AP13i, AP14
ML10B, ML55B
e
Half bridge
e1
ML30B (with AP14 only)
e2
4
Full bridge
1)
e1
e4
e2
e3
e = e1−e2+e3−e4
AP01i, AP03i, AP11i,
AP13i, AP14
ML10B, ML30B, ML55B,
ML38B1)
In connection with AP01i and AP03i
The measurement system always measures the total strain (e) of the individual strain gages in the Wheatstone
bridge. In practice individual strain gages are generally used for mechanical stress analysis.
Due to the temperature compensation, the larger measuring signal, better cable resistance compensation and in
some tension states the half bridge and the full bridge are used (e.g. for measuring on a bent rod).
The most important characteristic of an SG is the k-factor (strain sensitivity). The MGCplus measurement system
automatically switches over to strain measurement when a k-factor >0 is input. Scaling of the zero point and measuring range is carried out in mm/m. By changing the unit and input range, other physical variables (e.g. mechanical
stress in N/mm2) can be derived. If zero is entered as the k-factor the system switches over to mV/V.
Example:
A strain of up to 1000 mm/m is to be measured with 120 W single strain gages. The k-factor of the
SG is 2.05. The excitation voltage plays no part in this example. The setup for 2.5 V will be described.
E-29
System
Display
Amplifier
or
).
Options
.
3. Press
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
.
5. Select ”Type” in the pop-up menu.
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
SG−1/4−Bridge 120Ohm 4-wire
7. Use
2.5V↓
%↓
µm/m
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
100.000 ...
1000.000 ...
measure...
K-Factor:
CHANNEL1
3
Adjust amplifier
2.0500 ...
6. From the type selection field, select ”SG-1/4-Bridge 120 Ohm
4-wire” and from the excitation selection field select ”2.5 V”.
to select the ”K-Factor” edit field and enter the value
”2.05”. Press the confirmation key
.
measure
Since the amplifier automatically changes the native unit from mV/V
into µm/m once the k-factor is input, the physical unit plays no role
in this example. The menu window shown here is based on the
display using factory settings.
8. Use
to go to the righthand ”Zero pt.” edit field and enter the
value ”0”. Confirm with
9. Use
to go to the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field and enter the
10. Use
with
.
.
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
.
E-30
11. Press
.
System
Display
Amplifier
.
Options
13. Select µm/m from the selection field ”Unit” and confirm with
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
14. Use
to go to the “Abs” activation field and disable the absolute
display with the aid of
.
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
µm/m ↓
Unit
Abs
Display range
from −1000.000 µm/m
1000.000 µm/m
to
Step
1↓
.
.
16. Go to the ”Step*)” selection field, choose the required step and
confirm with
.
NOTE
Example: Input 1000.0 µm/m
→ Step 1 means the display is in steps of 100 nm/m
Input 10.000 µm/m
and confirm
.
18. Carry out a zero balance in no-load status (function key
factory settings).
in
Measure ➝ Inductive transducers
3.3
E-31
Inductive transducers
Inductive transducers (HBM displacement transducers) are passive transducers with the following characteristics:
•
•
•
they must be fed with an excitation voltage (carrier frequency)
they are inductive half bridges
The transducer has the following characteristic data:
− Nominal displacement (e.g. 20 mm)
− Nominal sensitivity (e.g. 10 mV/V)
The standard set-up for the excitation voltage UB in the case of inductive transducers is 2.5V. If higher measuring
ranges are required or if several transducers are connected in parallel, a lower excitation voltage must me selected.
The individual values depend on the type of plug-in module used.
Amplifier
Limits of the measuring range (mV/V)
UB=5V
UB=2.5V
UB=1V
ML50B
−
± 6.0...183.6
± 15.0...459.0
ML51B
± 0.1...3.06
−
± 0.5...15.3
ML55B
± 1.5...45.9
± 3.0...91.8
± 7.5...229.5
With these measuring range limits, a voltage of 1 V to 10 V can be generated at the analogue output, depending on
the setting.
NOTE
The specified full scale values are peak values and cannot be affected by adjusting the analogue output
settings.
E-32
The following example explains the settings for a displacement
transducer with the following characteristics:
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Nominal displacement 20 mm, excitation voltage 2.5 V, nominal
value 10 mV/V. The display range from 15 mm shall correspond to an
output of 10 V.
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
2. Use
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
IND half bridge
mV/V
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
20.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
✓
Adjust amplifier
measure
.
5. Use
2.5V↓
mm↓
measure...
K-Factor:
CHANNEL1
).
TRANSDUCER
or
to select ”IND half bridge” and confirm with
6. Use
select 2.5 V.
7. Confirm with
.
.
and
.
0.0000 ...
8. Use
the unit ”mm” and confirm with
9. Use
.
.
10. Position the transducer in the zero position.
. Select
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
E-33
11. Use
pt.”)
13. Enter the value ”10” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field (below the
unit mV/V).
14. Use
with
CHANNEL1
mm ↓
Unit
Display range
from −20.000 mm
20.000 mm
to
Step
1↓
and confirm
Adjust amplifier
. If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you
may continue with point 20. .
15. Use
DISPLAY
.
.
confirm with
.
NOTE
Example: Input 10.0 mm
→ Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 mm
Input 10.000 kg
19. Use
and confirm
.
E-34
3.3.2 Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer
By transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a defined
displacement occurs
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
Example: A displacement transducer with a nominal displacement of
20 mm (nominal value 10 mV/V) is set with a gauging block of 10 mm,
but the measuring range should be 15 mm.
NOTE
If zero point and nominal sensitivity are not modified (for instance
in the case of recalibration), you may omit point 1.−12..
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
IND half bridge
mm ↓
mV/V
measure
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
20.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
Adjust amplifier
or by directly inputting the channel you want
).
3. Use
4. Press
.
5. Select ”Transducer” from the pop-up menu and confirm with
0.0000 ...
✓
2. Use
(for example 3.2
2.5V↓
measure...
K-Factor:
CHANNEL1
6. Use
select 2.5 V.
7. Confirm with
mm
mV/V
1st pt.:
0.0000
0.0021
Measure
2nd pt.:
10.000
5.1032
Measure
OK
Cancel
Shunt off
8. Use
. Select
.
and
.
9. Use
.
.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
E-35
10. Use
pt.”)
11. Enter the value ”20” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field (below the
unit ”mm”) and confirm with
12. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
with
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
measure...
.
15. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand edit field of calibration point 1
and confirm with
IND half bridge
.
2.5V↓
mm ↓
16. Use cursor key
mV/V
Measure
in the ”1st
measure
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
20.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
measure...
K-Factor:
CHANNEL1
and confirm
Adjust amplifier
.
and confirm with
TRANSDUCER
.
Adjust amplifier
17. Use cursor key
.
to select the lefthand edit field from the ”2nd pt.”
0.0000 ...
✓
line, enter the value ”10” and confirm with
.
18. Position the gauging block below the probe tip of the displacement
transducer.
19. Use cursor key
mm
mV/V
1st pt.:
0.0000
0.0021
Measure
2nd pt.:
10.000
5.1032
Measure
OK
Shunt off
Measure
from the
”2nd pt.” line. If you now press
measurement starts, and the
current measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside
the Measure button.
Cancel
E-36
20. Use
to select the ”OK” button and confirm with
(the
amplifier converts the nominal value to 20mm; the calibration data
for 10mm stays unchanged).
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
21. Use
22. Select ”Analogue outputs” from the pull-up menu and confirm with
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
.
23. Select the gross signal from the ”Output Vo1” selection field and
confirm with
.
confirm with
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
CHANNEL1
Ouput Vo2: Net ↓
Output characteristics mm
V
Point 1: 0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
Point 2: 15.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
.
to go to the ”Output characteristics Pnt.2” edit field, and
25. Use
enter the required value (”15” on the left for the display, ”10” on the
right for the analogue output). Confirm with
.
.
and confirm
Measure Ý Torque transducers
3.4
E-37
Torque transducer
Torque transducers with different measurement principles require different amplifier modules in the MGCplus-system and therefore different operating steps.
The HBM torque transducers in the type series TB1A and TB2 work with SG full bridges. The procedure described
in Section 3.1 (SG transducer) must be followed to adapt the torque channels (ML10B, ML30B, ML38, ML55B) of
these transducers.
The adaptation of the speed channels (ML60B/ML460) corresponds to the procedure described in this chapter.
The HBM-torque transducers in type series T3_FNA and T10F−KF1 work with a frequency modulation procedure
(TF ca. 10kHz corresponds to unloaded shaft, modulation through load 5kHz). You will need the connection
plates AP07 or AP07/1 for processing measured values.
The HBM-torque flanges in type series T10F/T10FS−SF1/SU2 and T10FM require connection plate AP17 for operation with the amplifier modules ML60B (one amplifier module each for torque and speed).
When using the amplifier modules ML460 (multi-channel module) with the connection plates AP6401, the T10..
transducers must be powered externally.
For calculating additional parameters, such as the rotation output (product of speed and torque), the freely programmable module ML70B is recommended for MGCplus. Another option is the use of ”online calculation channels” in the HBM measured data recording software catman.
E-38
TRANSDUCER
Type:
Excitation:
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom. val.:
CHANNEL1
Special features of the ML460/AP460i:
Ext.fct...
The “Transducer” setup menu is expanded to include the “PWM” and
“Duration” types.
Freq.0..20kHz
Direct
Nm ↓
kHz
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
measure...
5.0000 ...
Adjust amplifier
measure
When inductive rotation speed transducers are connected (T-R coils)
select from the setup menu “Type: Freq. 0 ...x kHz” and “Link:
Integrating”.
Freq.0..2kHz
Freq.0..20kHz
Freq.0..200kHz
Freq.0..500kHz
Pulse counter
PWM
Duration
PWM (pulse width modulation)
THigh
When pulse width modulation is in use, the ratio of the pulse duration
(THigh) to the time interval (T) is evaluated (duty ratio).
The measuring range is 0 % ... 100 % duty ratio.
Duration
When pulse duration is in use only the absolute pulse duration (THigh) is
evaluated. The measuring range is 0 ... 2500 ms.
T
E-39
3.4.1 Direct input of torque characteristics
The following example explains the procedures for setting up the
torque, rotation-speed and performance channels (valid for the T3_FNA
type series):
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
Nominal torque of the shaft:
Nominal sensitivity:
Calibration characteristics:
Nominal speed:
50 N⋅m
5 kHz
24.22 N⋅m
3000 rpm
Rotation speed range to be displayed
for the application:
Display range for performance:
2000 rpm
10 kW
1. Use
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
CHANNEL1
Freq.0..20kHz
Ext.fct...
5V↓
Nm ↓
(for example 3.2
2. Use
).
kHz
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
5.0000 ...
measure...
measure
.
Adjust amplifier
.
5. Use
to select ”Freq.0..20 kHz” and confirm with
6. Use
select 5 V. Confirm with
7. Use
.
and
.
the unit ”N⋅m” and confirm with
. Select
.
8. Enter the value ”0” in the lefthand ”Zero pt.” edit field.
9. Enter the value ”10” in the righthand ”Zero pt.” edit field (or if the
transducer is not under load, activate the button labelled measure ).
E-40
11. Enter the value ”5” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
12. Use
with
and confirm
Adjust amplifier
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
13. Use
.
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
Nm ↓
Unit
Display range
from −50.000 Nm
50.000 Nm
to
Step
1↓
.
confirm with
.
and confirm
.
*)NOTE
Example:
Input 50.0 N⋅m
→ Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 N⋅m
Input 50.000 N⋅m
E-41
3.4.2 Measuring with the built-in shunt
System
Display
Amplifier
NOTE
Options
If zero point and nominal torque are not modified (for instance in
the case of recalibration), you may omit point 1.−9..
1. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
(for example 3.2
2. Use
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
CHANNEL1
).
.
Freq.0..20kHz
5V↓
Nm ↓
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
5.0000 ...
measure...
.
kHz
measure
5. Use
to select ”Freq.0..20kHz” and confirm with
6. Use
.
Adjust amplifier
select 5V. Confirm with
7. Use
Nm
kHz
1st pt.:
0.0000
10.056
Measure
2nd pt.:
24.220
2.4210
Measure
OK
.
the unit ”N⋅m” and confirm with
and
. Select
.
Shunt on
Cancel
E-42
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
9. Use
to select the ”Adjust amplifier” button and confirm with
10. Use
measure...
and confirm with
.
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
and confirm with
13. Use cursor key
.
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
in the ”1st
.
CHANNEL1
14. Use
Freq.0..20kHz
5V↓
Nm ↓
to go to the ”Shunt off” selection field, press
select ”Shunt on”. Confirm with
kHz
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
5.0000 ...
measure...
Measure
and
.
measure
15. Use
Adjust amplifier
Measure
from the ”2nd pt.” line. If you
now press
, measurement starts and the present value in kHz
is displayed on the left next to the Measure key symbol.
16. Use
to select the lefthand edit field in the ”2nd pt.” line. Enter
the calibration characteristics ”24.22” and confirm with
Nm
kHz
1st pt.:
0.0000
0.0000
Measure
2nd pt.:
24.220
2.4210
Measure
OK
Shunt on
17. Use
to select the key symbol ”OK” and confirm with
(the
amplifier converts the nominal value to 50 N⋅m; the calibration data
for 25 N⋅m stays unchanged).
Cancel
.
.
E-43
.
20. Go to the ”Step” selection field, choose the required step and
confirm with
.
*)NOTE
Example:
Input 50.0 N⋅m
Input 50.000 N⋅m
and confirm
.
E-44
“Extended functions” set−up window for ML60B:
Glitch filter
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
If this filter has been switched on, interfering signals with pulse widths
below 1.6 ms will be suppressed.
LIV1 switch output
The frequency signal F1 or the counter signal can be applied to the
switching output of limit value switch 1 (see figure).
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
TRANSDUCER
Typ:
Excitation:
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom. val.:
LIV1 switch output states
CHANNEL1
Freq.0..20kHz
Ext.fct...
5V↓
Nm ↓
F1
kHz
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
5.0000 ...
measure...
measure
1.6 ms
Adjust amplifier
Extended functions
!
Glitch filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms)
Frequency quadrupling
Evaluate F2 signal
Zero index input active
Transd. error input active
LIV1 switch output:
F1 Counter signal to LIV1
LIV2 switch output:
Off ↓
OK
Cancel
Off
F2 to LIV2
Direction of rotation to LIV2
Off
F1 to GW1
F1 Counter signal to GW1
Counter
signal to
LIV1
All extended functions that have not been mentioned here are
insignificant for torque measurements and must be deactivated (default
settings).
E-45
3.5
Adapting the rotation-speed channel
The following calculation is needed for setting up the speed channel:
Nominal speed: nA = 3000 rpm
Number of impulses/revolution: i = 30 (see table below, type T30FNA)
nA x i
Impulse frequency
60
In this example:
3000 x 30 =
1500 Hz
60
i.e. a frequency of up to 1500Hz is to be measured.
*)
Torque transducer
Number of impulses per revolution
(two outputs shifted by 90o)
T4WA
90
T30FNA
30
T32FNA
15
T34FNA
15
T10F
15...720*)
See T10F documentation.
E-46
1. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
3.2
or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example
).
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
TRANSDUCER
Typ:
Excitation:
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom. val.:
Freq.0..20kHz
Ext.fct...
Nm ↓
5. Use
to select ”Freq.0..2 kHz” and confirm with
6. Use
.
.
and
.
kHz
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
5.0000 ...
measure...
.
CHANNEL1
5V↓
measure
Adjust amplifier
Extended functions
Evaluate F2 signal
7. Use
the unit ”rpm” and confirm with
. Select
.
8. Enter the value ”0” in the ”Zero pt.” edit field (lefthand column ”rpm”
and righthand column ”kHz”).
10. Enter the value ”1.5” in the righthand ”Nom.val.” edit field.
LIV1 switch output:
Off ↓
LIV2 switch output:
Off ↓
OK
11. Use
with
and confirm
Adjust amplifier
Cancel
E-47
12. Use
.
.
15. Go to the ”Step” selection field, choose the required step and
confirm with
.
*)NOTE
Example:
Input 1000.0 rpm
→ Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 rpm
Input 1000.000 rpm
and confirm
.
E-48
Glitch-Filter
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
below 1.6 ms will be suppressed.
LIV1 switch output
switching output of limit value switch 1 (see figure).
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
TRANSDUCER
Typ:
Excitation:
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom. val.:
LIV1 switch output states
CHANNEL1
Freq.0..20kHz
Ext.fct...
5V↓
Nm ↓
F1
kHz
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
5.0000 ...
measure...
measure
Adjust amplifier
Extended functions
!
Glitch Filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms)
Evaluate F2 signal
LIV1 switch output:
LIV2 switch output:
Off ↓
OK
Cancel
Off
F2 to LIV2
Direction of rotation to GW2
Off
F1 to LIV1
Counter
signal to
LIV1
1
.
6
m
s
All extended functions that have not been mentioned here are
insignificant for torque measurements and must be deactivated (default
settings).
E-49
Measure Ý Thermocouples
3.6
Thermocouples
Thermocouples are active transducers. For measurements using
thermocouples you need the ML01B amplifier plug-in module and the
AP09 connection board. The AP09 has a built-in reference temperature
measuring point. The amplifier plug-in module carries out cold-spot
compensation and linearisation for type J, T, K and S thermocouples.
With the ’Thermocouples’ operating mode and units °C or °F selected,
the temperature will be displayed appropriately in the required unit.
With Volt selected as the unit, scaling is carried out in accordance with
the output voltage1).
The following example explains the settings:
Type K thermocouple, the temperature is to be displayed in °C , with a
temperature of 50°C corresponding to an output signal of 0 V. The
temperature of 70°C corresponds to an output signal of +10 V.
Display
(°C)
70
50
Nom.val.
Upon switching to another thermocouple type, the values for the
following functions are reset to their default values:
Cut-off frequency; limit switches; peak values; unit of measure; zero
balance
−10
10
Amplifier
Output signal (V)
1)
If you wish to measure the output voltage of the thermocouple directly (without
linearisation and cold-spot compensation), you must set up under ’75 mV’ operating
mode.
E-50
1. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
3.2
2. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
.
Thermocpl.K
5. Use
to select ”Thermocpl.K” and confirm with
6. Use
the unit ”°C” and confirm with
°C
50.0000 ...
50.0000 ...
20.0000 ...
20.0000 ...
measure...
).
CHANNEL1
no
°C↓
Adjust amplifier
measure
.
.
. Select
.
8. Enter the value ”20” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.” edit field
(70°C−50°C=20°C).
9. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
10. Use
.
E-51
.
confirm with
.
NOTE
Example:
Input 10.0°C
→ Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1°C
Input 50.000°C
and confirm
.
Measure ➝ Current and voltage measurement
E-52
3.7
Current and voltage measurement
To measure current signals and voltage signals you need the ML01B amplifier plug-in module or the ML801B multichannel module with the AP801 connection board.
The following example explains the set-ups:
A torque transducer with integral amplifier delivers a maximum output signal of 3 V, corresponding to a nominal
torque of 20 N⋅m. A display range of 20.000 N⋅m is to be set up. For control purposes an output signal of 10 V is
required.
3.7.1
E-53
Direct input of transducer characteristics
1. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
3.2
2. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
).
.
Channel 1
5. Use
to select ”10 V” and confirm with
6. Use
.
.
. Select
10V
the unit ”Nm” and confirm with
no
Nm↓
0.00000 ...
Vi
50.0000 ...
20.0000 ...
3.0000 ...
measure...
Adjust amplifier
measure
.
8. Enter the value ”0” in the righthand ”Zero pt.” edit field.
11. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
12. Use
.
.
E-54
confirm with
System
Display
Amplifier
.
Options
NOTE
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
Nm ↓
Unit
Display range
from −20.000 Nm
20.000 Nm
to
Step
1↓
Example:
Input 10.0 N⋅m
Input 10.000 N⋅m
.
and confirm
Measure ➝ Resistance temperature detectors
3.8
E-55
Resistance temperature detectors
Resistance temperature detectors are passive transducers. For this transducer you need the ML35B one-channel
amplifier plug-in module or the ML801B multi-channel module with the AP835 connection board. They carry out
automatic linearisation and display the temperature in correct digits.
With ’resistance temperature detector’ operating mode and unit °C or °F selected, the corresponding temperature
will be displayed in degrees of the required unit. With Volt selected as the unit, scaling is carried out in accordance
with the output voltage1).
Type Pt100 resistance temperature detector, the temperature is to be displayed in °C , with a temperature of 50°C
corresponding to an output signal of 0 V. The output signal at 70°C is to be +10 V.
1)
The permissible ranges depend on the bridge excitation voltage. If a measuring range is set up that exceeds the amplifier’s adjustment
range, the maximum or minimum possible value is adopted.
E-56
3.8.1
1. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
3.2
Options
2. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
measure...
Adjust amplifier
.
CHANNEL1
Type:
Pt100
Connection: 4-wire
°C↓
Unit:
°C
50.0000 ...
Zero pt.: 50.0000 ...
20.0000
...
20.0000 ...
Nom.val.:
).
5. Use
TRANSDUCER
to select ”Pt100” and confirm with
.
.
6. Select the required connection mode from the ”Connection”
selection field.*)
7. Use
. Select
measure
the unit ”°C” and confirm with
.
9. Enter the value ”20” in the lefthand ”Nom.val.:” edit field
(70°C−50°C=20°C).
10. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
11. Use
*)
.
In 4-wire technology, compensation is made for cable resistance up to a length of
500 m.
E-57
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
confirm with
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
°C↓
Unit
Display range
from −30,000 °C
30,000 °C
to
Step
1↓
.
.
NOTE
Example:
Input 10.0°C
Input 50.000°C
and confirm
.
Measure ➝ Resistors
E-58
3.9
Resistors
Resistors are passive transducers. These transducers require the ML35B , amplifier plug-in module, which has two
coarse measuring ranges available (0...500 Ω and 0...5 kΩ).
Resistance value 400 Ω, Input range 400.00 Ω
The input range of 400 Ω corresponds to an output signal of 10 V.
3.9.1
E-59
1. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
3.2
Options
2. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
measure...
400.0000 ...
.
.
to select ”500Ohm” (this is the input range of the amplifier)
and confirm with
.
6. Select the required connection mode from the ”Connection”
selection field.*)
Ohm
0.00000 ...
CHANNEL1
Type:
500 Ohm
Connection: 4-wire
Ohm↓
Unit:
Zero pt.: 0.00000 ...
Nom.val.: 400.0000 ...
).
5. Use
TRANSDUCER
measure
7. Use
Adjust amplifier
the unit ”Ohm” and confirm with
. Select
.
8. Enter the value ”0” in both the ”Zero pt.” edit fields.
10. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
11. Use
*)
In 4-wire technology, compensation is made for cable resistance up to a length of
500 m.
E-60
.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
.
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
confirm with
.
NOTE
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
Ohm↓
Unit
Display range
from −400.000 Ohm
400.000 Ohm
to
Step
1↓
Example:
Input 10.0 Ω
→ Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 Ω
Input 10.000 Ω
15. To return to measuring mode, press
prompt with
.
and confirm the security
Measure ➝ Impulse counting
3.10
E-61
Impulse counting
The ML60B amplifier is required for impulse counting purposes. It enables a maximum impulse-sequence frequency of 1 MHz to be processed. For more details on further amplifier setup options refer to chapter 3.4, page
E-44. Incremental transducers − e.g. for angle measurement − deliver two square-wave signals which are 90° out
of phase. The clock ratio between High and Low for both signals must be approx. 1:1.
An angle of rotation transducer delivers 180 impulses per revolution. These impulses are to be displayed as 360° .
Due to the number of impulses per revolution the value 2 is specified as Step, since a higher resolution would make
no sense. The levels of the square-wave signal amount to 10 V.
A frequency signal with quadrupled counter impulses is required at the output in addition to the measured value.
E-62
1. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
3.2
2. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
TRANSDUCER
Type:
Excitation:
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
5V
deg↓
Ext.fct...
0.00000 ...
kImp
0.00000 ...
360.0000 ...
0.18000 ...
measure...
).
CHANNEL1
Impuls counter
measure
Adjust amplifier
.
.
5. Use
to select the ”Impuls counter” type and confirm with
.
6. Use
and
.
7. Use
to switch to the Ext.fct...
button and confirm with
(For details on the extended functions refer to page E-64).
8. Use
.
to select the “Frequency quadrupling” and “Evaluate F2
Extended functions
!
!
Evaluate F2 signal
Transducer error input active
LIV1 switch output :
F1 Counting signal to LIV1
Off ↓
OK
Cancel
signal” activation fields and press
9. Use
to activate them.
to change to the ”LIV1 switch output” selection field, select
“F1 counter signal to LIV1” and confirm with
10. Use
to switch to the
OK
.
.
E-63
11. Use
to change to the “Unit” selection field and press
.
Select the unit “deg” and confirm with
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
.
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
15. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
may continue with point 20.
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
deg ↓
Unit
Display range
from −360.000 deg
360.000 deg
to
Step
2↓
16. Use
.
.
.
.
21. Select Value 2 from the ”Step*)” selection field (1 impulse
corresponds to 2°; 180 impulses/revolution corresponds to 360°)
and confirm with
.
prompt with
.
Assign a free F-key to the function ”Zeroing” (factory settings: Level 1/F1). Then return to
measuring mode. If you then press the appropriate F-key, the impulse counter is set to
”0”. See also chap. ”Assigning F-keys”; page G-24.
E-64
Glitch filter
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
below 1.6ms will be suppressed.
The frequency quadrupling results in an increased signal resolution by
counting of both the positive and the negative signal edges. With both
frequency inputs (F1 and F2) having been connected, the measuring
frequency is quadrupled. If F2 has not been connected,the measuring
frequency is doubled.
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
Evaluate F2 signal (recognition of direction)
TRANSDUCER
Typ:
Excitation:
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom. val.:
CHANNEL1
The phase−shifted signal F2 is evaluated thus enabling the direction of
rotation or motion to be displayed.
Ext.fct...
Freq.0..20kHz
5V↓
Nm ↓
kHz
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
360.0000 ...
0.1800 ...
measure...
measure
Adjust amplifier
Extended functions
!
!
Evaluate F2 signal
Transducer error input active
Off ↓
Off ↓
OK
Transducer error input active (only with AP01i)
If a signal is connected (0V level), the amplifier interprets the measured
value as an error (e.g. in the case of a failure of the luminescent source
with optical systems).
LIV1 switch output
switching output of limit value switch 1.
Cancel
Off
F2 to LIV2
Direction of rotation to LIV2
Off
F1 to LIV1
F1 Counting signal to LIV1
With incremental transducers this input is used for resetting the counter
in counting mode.
LIV2 switch output
The frequency signal F2 or the signal for the direction of rotation can be
applied to the switching output of limit value switch 2.
E-65
F1
F2
Counting signal to
LIV1 with activated
quadruple evaluation
Measure ➝ Piezoelectric transducers
E-66
4
Piezoelectric transducers
Piezoelectric transducers are active transducers that emit a charge in the event of mechanical loading. When using
these transducers, please observe the following instructions:
•
•
For transducer connection, special cable with high isolation resistance, low capacitance, low noise and a wide
temperature range is essential. Standard coaxial cable is unsuitable for this type of application.
For quasi-static measurements a very high isolation resistance (>100TΩ ) is required. For this reason all input
plugs must be kept clean and should not be touched by hand. Please use a suitable cleaning agent for cleaning
(e.g. pure petroleum spirit).
To operate piezoelectric transducers you need the AP08 connection board with the charge amplifier and an ML10B
or ML01B DC amplifier.
A piezoelectric transducer can be thought of as a capacitor that is charged by mechanical loading. In all cases, discharging is via the input and isolation resistor on the amplifier. The time constant determines the speed of discharge. There are three time constants from which to choose:
SHORT
MEDIUM
LONG
for dynamic measurement
for dynamic measurement with a limited frequency range
for quasi-static measurement
Coarse and fine adjustment can be chosen for the measuring range selection. There are four input ranges for
coarse adjustment: 100 pC; 1; 10 and 100 nC.
Example: If the measuring range 6000 pC is wanted, set up the next higher input range of 10 nC.
E-67
With a constant transducer loading the value in the display or at the output signal may drift. This may result from
insufficient cable isolation resistance or incorrect drift balance on the amplifier.
We recommend that all male connectors should first be cleaned. If the problem persists, the drift needs to be readjusted (see chap.4.2).
You wish to use a piezoelectric acceleration transducer for measurement. Transducer nominal value is 100 pC/g.
Dynamic measurement is to be taken, up to 60 g = 10 V.
Measuring range 60 g ⋅100 pC/g = 6000 pC
Dynamic measurement, i.e. time constant SHORT.
E-68
4.1
Connecting and measuring
Resetting the charge amplifier (RESET):
Gross
1−ML10B
Channel
Measure
1. Assign an F-key (in this case factory setting F2) to the
”Zero/Cal/Measure” function (see page G-23ff).
2. Select screen type ”1 value (with status line)” (see page G-3ff).
Measure
3. Reset the charge amplifier:
Now press the F-key assigned under point 1 until ”Zero” appears on
the status line.
AP08
NOTE
Transducer connection
(BNC female connector)
When you have just switched the unit on this step is not
necessary, since the input is automatically set to zero.
4. Unloading the transducer:
Immediately before connecting the transducer, the cable must be
short-circuited.
a) Connect the centre pin of the BNC male connector for a moment to
the connector housing.
b) Connect the transducer to the BNC female connector of the AP08.
5. Starting to measure:
Now press the F-key assigned under point 1 until ”Measure”
appears in the status line.
6. We recommend selecting the ZERO position with the F-key when
measurement is not in progress.
E-69
If the error message OVERFLOW occurs during set-up:
•
Press the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” F-key until Zero appears on
the status line.
•
•
Wait until the display comes to a stop.
Press the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” F-key until ”Measure” is
displayed.
E-70
1. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
3.2
2. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
TRANSDUCER
Zero pt.: 0.00000 ...
Nom.val.: 60.0000 ...
measure...
).
.
CHANNEL1
Type
< 10nC
Time constant short↓
g↓
Unit:
5. Use
to select transducer type ”< 10 nC” and confirm with
6. Use
to go to the ”Decay time” selection field, press
select ”Short”. Confirm with
nC
0.00000 ...
6.00000 ...
Adjust amplifier
measure
.
7. Use
and
.
the unit ”g” and confirm with
.
. Select
.
11. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
12. Use
and confirm
E-71
.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
.
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
confirm with
.
*)NOTE
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
deg ↓
Unit
Display range
from −360.000 deg
360.000 deg
to
Step
2↓
Example:
Input 10.0 nC
→ Step width 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 nC
Input 10.000 nC
prompt with
.
E-72
4.1.2 Setting up the zero point
Zero point is set up in measuring mode with the ”Measure” and
”Zeroing” functions.
Time constant ”Short”
(factory setting: Measure, 2nd level) until
”Measure” appears in the status line.
2. Press the function key to which you have assigned the function
”Zeroing” ( −>0<− ) (factory setting F1/Level 1).
Time constant ”Medium/Long”
a few times (factory setting: Measure, 2nd level) until
1. Press
”Zero” is displayed on the status line.
2. Press the function key to which you have assigned the function
”Zeroing” ( −>0<− ) (factory setting F1/Level 1).
3. Press
a few times (Measure, 2nd level) until ”Measure” is
displayed on the status line.
E-73
4.1.3 Special case: initial charge is known
In this case zero point setting is omitted for one measurement.
1. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
3.2
).
2. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
.
TRANSDUCER
CHANNEL1
Type
< 10nC
Time constant short↓
g↓
Unit:
Zero pt.: 0.00000 ...
Nom.val.: 60.0000 ...
measure...
nC
0.12000 ...
measure
.
5. Use
to select transducer type ”< 10nC” and confirm with
6. Use
to go to the ”Time constant” selection field, press
select ”Short”. Confirm with
.
and
.
6.00000 ...
Adjust amplifier
7. Use
the unit ”g” and confirm with
. Select
.
9. Enter the value of the initial load in the righthand ”Zero pt.” edit field
(e.g. 0.12).
10. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
.
prompt with
.
E-74
4.2
Drift balancing
The drift will have been balanced at the factory. However, the balancing
procedure must be repeated from time to time due to the effects of
aging and temperature.
AP08
ZERO-potentiometer
for setting the drift
•
•
Connect the unladen transducer to the amplifier before it is
switched on
Switch the instrument on and wait 30min.
Set-up mode:
•
Select nC as the unit of measure
•
Set input range and measuring range to <100 pC
•
Set time constant to Long
Measuring mode:
•
•
•
Use
to select gross signal
Press the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” F-key a few times until ”Measure” is
Turn the set-up potentiometer (see accompanying figure) until the
value stops.
If the error message OVERFLOW occurs during set-up:
•
•
•
Press the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” F-key a few times until ”Zero” is
Wait for the display to come to a stop
Press the ”Zero/Cal/Measure” F-key a few times until ”Measure” is
Measure ➝ Current-fed piezoelectric transducers
5
E-75
Current-fed piezoelectric transducers
Piezoelectric transducers with a built-in preamplifier are often used for acceleration and force measurement. These
transducers need a constant current for the power supply. The measurement signal corresponds to the modulated
voltage at the power line. A typical example of this product family is the DeltaTronT acceleration transducer from
Brüel&Kjaer.
To operate current-fed piezoelectric transducers you will need connection board AP18i and an ML10B or ML01B
DC amplifier. You can select rough and fine adjustment for the measuring range. 3 input ranges are available for
coarse adjustment: 0.1 V; 1 V; 10 V.
Example: If you want a measuring range of 7 V the next input range up 10 V is set.
The zero point defines the voltage which generates 0 V at the output of the amplifier. The nominal value is always
defined relative to this zero point.
Analogue outputs are used to define the display scaling, i.e. they are used to define the value that is displayed for
an output signal of 10 V.
An acceleration of up to 300 m/s2 is to be measured with a DeltaTronT transducer. The nominal value of the transducer is 1 mV/ m/s2.
Measuring range (fine adjustment):
300 m/s2 x 1 mV/m/s2 = 0.3 V
Input range (coarse adjustment):
1 V ( > 0.3 V)
E-76
5.1
1. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
3.2
).
2. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
Type
Excitation:
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
.
5. Use
TRANSDUCER
CHANNEL1
.
to select transducer type ”Deltatron 1V” and confirm with
.
Deltatron 1V
6. Use
2−20mA
m/s2↓
0.00000 ...
Vi
0.00000 ...
300.0000 ...
0.30000 ...
measure...
Adjust amplifier
measure
the unit ”m/s2” and confirm with
. Select
.
10. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
11. Use
and confirm
E-77
.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
.
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
confirm with
.
*)NOTE
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
m/s2 ↓
Unit
Display range
from −300.000 m/s2
300.000 m/s2
to
Step
1↓
Example:
Input 10.0 m/s2
→ Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 m/s2
Input 10.000 m/s2
prompt with
.
E-78
6
Measure Ý Piezoresistive transducers
Piezoresistive transducers
Piezoresistive transducers are passive transducers.
Pressure transducer with the following characteristics:
Rated pressure 300 bar, excitation 10 V, rated sensitivity 200 mV/V,
Display range 300 bar, test pressure 250 bar (partial load)
Due to the high sensitivity you must use the ML10B amplifier.
Zero point and measuring range can be set up directly with the transducer characteristics or by means of a test
pressure. Both methods are described below.
E-79
6.1
1. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
3.2
2. Use
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation:
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
).
.
CHANNEL1
.
5. Use
and confirm with
.
6. Use
to switch to the ”Excitation” selection field and press
.
Full bridge − high level
Select ”10V” and confirm with
10V↓
bar ↓
0.00000 ...
mV/V
0.00000 ...
300.0000 ...
200.0000 ...
measure...
Adjust amplifier
measure
7. Use
.
the unit ”bar” and confirm with
. Select
.
11. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
E-80
12. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
.
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
confirm with
.
prompt with
DISPLAY
.
.
CHANNEL1
bar ↓
Unit
Display range
from −300.000 bar
300.000 bar
to
Step
1↓
*)NOTE
Example:
Input 10.0 bar
→ Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 bar
Input 10.000 bar
E-81
6.1.1
Measuring transducer characteristics
Transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a
defined test pressure occurs.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
NOTE
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
1. Use
3.2
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
CHANNEL1
2. Use
).
5V↓
bar ↓
3. Press
.
mV/V
measure
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
300.0000 ...
200.000 ...
measure...
.
Adjust amplifier
5. Use
select 10V.
0.0000 ...
K-Factor:
6. Confirm with
bar
mV/V
1st pt.:
0.0000
0.0021
Measure
2nd pt.:
250.000
166.67
Measure
OK
Cancel
Shunt off
7. Use
.
the unit ”bar” and confirm with
8. Use
. Select
.
9. Use
and
.
to go to the ”Nom.val.” edit field and enter the value ”300”
in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with
.
E-82
10. Use
with
System
Display
Amplifier
.
Options
and confirm with
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
TRANSDUCER
measure...
.
and confirm with
14. Use
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
and confirm
Adjust amplifier
CHANNEL1
.
confirm with
Measure
in the ”1st pt.” line and
.
5V↓
bar ↓
15. Use
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
2.0000 ...
measure...
measure
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
K-Factor:
the value ”250” and confirm with
.
16. Set up the transducer with the test pressure.
17. Use cursor key
Measure
from the
”Point 2” line. If you now press
measurement starts, and the
current measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside
the Measure .
bar
mV/V
1st pt.:
0.0000
0.0021
Measure
2nd pt.:
250.000
166.67
Measure
OK
to select the lefthand edit field from the ”2nd pt.” line, enter
mV/V
Shunt off
18. Use
to select the button labelled OK
and confirm with
(the amplifier converts the nominal value to 300 bar; the calibration
data for 250 bar stays unchanged).
Cancel
prompt with
.
E-83
Measure Ý Potentiometric transducers
7
Potentiometric transducers
Resistors are passive transducers. These transducers require the ML35B , amplifier plug-in module, which has two
coarse measuring ranges available (0...500 Ω and 0...5 kΩ).
Potentiometric transducers are passive transducers that have to be supplied with an excitation voltage. To operate
a potentiometric transducer you require the ML10B amplifier. Please note that the maximum resistance value is
5 kΩ.
A potentiometric displacement transducer with a nominal displacement of 10 mm is used for measurement. The
whole nominal displacement is to be used. The display range is 10 mm.
Due to the interdependence between excitation voltage and nominal input voltage (mV/V), in the case of an excitation voltage of 2.5 V, the measuring range needs to be set up in accordance with the following correlation:
Nominal value to be set up =
(RANGE)
Rated voltage (displacement)
Excitation voltage
Nominal value (range) = 2.5 V / 2.5 V = 1000 mV/V
This value of 1000 mV/V or 1 V/V only changes if a potentiometric transducer is used in a section.
As the second method, partial calibration with end values of 7 mm is performed for calibration of the zero point and
range with a defined displacement.
E-84
7.1
1. Use
3.2
System
Display
Amplifier
TRANSDUCER
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
.
CHANNEL1
.
5. Use
and confirm with
.
6. Use
to switch to the ”Excitation” selection field and press
Select ”2.5 V” and confirm with
.
.
2.5V↓
mm ↓
mV/V
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
1000.000 ...
measure...
K-Factor:
).
Options
2. Use
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
measure
7. Use
. Select
.
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
11. Use
with
Adjust amplifier
12. Use
and confirm
E-85
.
.
confirm with
.
prompt with
.
*)NOTE
Example:
Input 10.0 mm
Input 10,000 mm
E-86
7.1.1
Measuring transducer characteristics
Transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a
defined displacement occurs.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
NOTE
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
1. Use
3.2
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
CHANNEL1
2. Use
).
2.5V↓
mm ↓
3. Press
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
1000.000 ...
measure...
measure
5. Use
select 2.5 V.
6. Confirm with
mm
mV/V
1st pt.:
0.0000
0.0021
Measure
2nd pt.:
7.0000
699.23
Measure
OK
.
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
K-Factor:
.
mV/V
Cancel
Shunt off
7. Use
.
8. Use
.
to go to the ”Nom.val.” edit field and enter the value ”10” in
. Select
.
9. Use
and
.
E-87
10. Use
to go to the righthand ”Nom.val.:” edit field and enter the
System
Display
Amplifier
.
Options
11. Use
and confirm with
measure...
.
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
12. Slide the core into the transducer until zero is displayed.
and confirm with
14. Use
TRANSDUCER
Type
Excitation
Unit:
Zero pt.:
Nom.val.:
CHANNEL1
.
and confirm with
Measure...
in the ”1st pt.” line
.
15. Use cursor key
2.5V↓
mm ↓
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
10.0000 ...
1000.000 ...
measure...
to select the lefthand edit field from the ”Point
mV/V
Adjust amplifier
measure
2” line, enter the value ”7” and confirm with
.
16. Position the gauging block below the probe tip of the displacement
transducer.
0.0000 ...
K-Factor:
17. Use
Measure
from the ”2nd pt.” line.
If you now press
measurement starts, and the current
measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside the
Measure .
mm
mV/V
1st pt.:
0.0000
0.0021
Measure
2nd pt.:
7.0000
699.23
Measure
OK
Cancel
Shunt off
18. Use
to select the button labelled OK
and confirm with
(the amplifier converts the nominal value to 10mm; the calibration
data for 7mm stays unchanged).
prompt with
.
E-88
F-1
F
Additional functions
F-2
F-3
Additional functions Ý Remotes
1
Remote (one-channel modules only)
1.1
Switching on remote control
The remote contacts are used to control important functions of the
amplifier by means of digital inputs. These remotes are only active
when remote control is switched on.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
There are three ways in which you can switch remote control on or off.
•
In measuring mode: Press function key
twice followed by
Remote contacts
function key
Remote contacts
Remote control
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
•
Channel 1
On ↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
On
Off
(factory setting).
In set-up mode: press function key
. The ”Switch” set-up
window lets you switch remote control on or off.
•
By means of the remote contacts (with function REMT).
No function
ACAL−autocal
TARA−tare
CPV1−clear store 1
HLD1−hold store 1
CPV2−clear store 2
HLD2−hold store 2
ZERO−zero balance
SHNT−Shunt ON/OFF
PRNT−select for printing
CAL−input to cal. signal
ZERO−input to zero signal
INV−change sign
PSEL1−select line param. set 1
REMT−Remote ON/OFF
INT−Start/Stop Integration
F-4
1.2
Assigning remote contacts
Remotes can be assigned freely and are not defined in the factory setup. The available functions and a description
of each are shown in the following table:
Function
Level 5 V
(Level 0V for AP13i)
Level 0 V
(Level 24 V for AP13i)
ACAL
Autocalibration ON
Autocalibration OFF
TARA
Taring starts on transition 5 V→0 V (0 V→24 V for AP13i)
CPV1/2
Peak value 1/2 is
stored
Peak value 1/2 is cleared from current value
HLD1/2
Peak value store 1/2 free
Contents of peak value store 1/2
frozen
ZERO
Current measuring signal is set to zero on transition 5 V→0 V (0 V→24 V for AP13i)
SHNT
Shunt off
Shunt on
PRNT
When printing is enabled the channel is
taken into account
When printing is enabled the channel is not
taken into account
CAL
Input is switched to internal calibration
source
ZERO
Input is switched to zero signal
INV
Polarity is switched over
(ML60B only)
PSEL1
Parameter set select code line 1(see Table 1.1)
PSEL2
Parameter set select code line 2 (see Table 1.1)
PSEL4
Parameter set select code line 4 (see Table 1.1)
REMT
INT
All connection boards (except AP13i):
Integration starts at the transition from 5 V − 0 V and stops at the transition from 0 V − 5 V.
Connection boards AP13i:
Integration starts at the transition from 0 V − 24 V and stops at the transition
from 24 V − 0 V.
F-5
Parameter set selection
PSEL1
PSEL2
PSEL4
Parameter set selected
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
2
0
1
0
3
1
1
0
4
0
0
1
5
1
0
1
6
0
1
1
7
1
1
1
8
Table 1.1
0: Remote contacts not driven; Level 5 V (level 0 V in the case of 13i).
1: Remote contacts driven; Level 0 V; connected to digital ground (level 24 V in the case of 13i).
F-6
2
Additional functions Ý Limit switches
Limit switches (one-channel modules only)
In order to assess mass or weight tolerances, or when monitoring
forces, pressures etc., it is often necessary to comply with certain target
values or limit switches. Each amplifier plug-in module therefore has
four limit switches available (in ex-factory status these are OFF).
They can be used to specify the level, the hysteresis and the direction
of each for limit switch monitoring. The hysteresis value prevents
”fluttering” of the limit switches upon reaching the switching threshold.
The prevailing connection state is indicated by an LED on the front
panel of the amplifier plug-in module when the STATUS display format
is enabled.
Displays
limit switches status
Please note the following points when working with limit switches:
−
The measuring signal must last for at least 1 ms. The measurement
voltage delivered by the amplifier is compared internally with the
reference voltage. If the measurement voltage reaches or exceeds
the reference voltage that has been set, the associated logic output
is switched and the appropriate LED indicates the connection state.
−
If you are using the AP02 connection board, you also have relay
contacts available.
−
Connection board AP13i has 24 V PLC−compatible, optically
decoupled limit switch outputs.
F-7
2.1
Activate limit switches
In the ex-factory setting, the limit switches are not enabled (Enable limit
switch ”Off”).
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
2. Press
Limit switches
3. Select ”Limit switches” from the pop-up menu and confirm with
4. Select ”Yes” from the ”Enable” selection field and confirm with
Limit switch 1
Limit switches
.
Channel 1
1 ...
Name
1-Limit1 ...
Enable
Input signal
Level
No ↓
100.000 ...
%
Hysteresis
1,000 ...
%
Direction
Output logic
Over limit ↓
Delay
define...
Input
Message when ON
free ↓
1-Limit1 ON...
Normal ↓
Message when OFF
1-Limit1 OFF...
Normal ↓
free
disabled
.
NOTE
Gross ↓
The screen type ”Status limit switch”, which enables the status of
limit switches to be displayed, is set up under Screen No. 5
ex-factory (see also chap.1.4, ”Status limit switch” ; page G-21).
The limit switches must be enabled in advance (see chap. 2.2;
page F-8).
Positiv logic ↓
No
Yes
Positive logic
Negative logic
Over limit
Below limit
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
Normal
Inverse
F-8
2.2
Setting up limit switches
Limit switch 1
Limit switches
Set-up window Limit switches
Channel 1
1 ...
Setting up and activating the limit switches (Enable).
Name
1-Limit1 ...
Enable
Input signal
Level
No ↓
100.000 ...
%
Hysteresis
1,000 ...
%
Direction
Output logic
Over limit ↓
•
Gross ↓
to go to the required
Enter a number (1 to 4) and confirm with
set-up range; this saves you having to run through all the edit fields
or selection fields with the cursor keys.
Positiv logic ↓
Delay
define...
Input
Message when ON
free ↓
1-Limit1 ON...
Normal ↓
Message when OFF
1-Limit1 OFF...
Normal ↓
free
disabled
•
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
Positive logic
Negative logic
Normal
Inverse
Enable
Switches limit switch monitoring on or off.
•
Input signal
Selects the source of the signal that you want to monitor
(Gross/Net/Peak values/Peak value combine).
No
Yes
•
Level
Input the operate value in displayed units (e.g. kg).
LIV-Delay
12 3 4
LIV-On
Delay time
LIV-Off
0ms
OK
OK
Name
Name of the limit switch or its function, depending on your choice
(for example ”Emergency Off”).
•
Over limit
Below limit
Limit switches
Cancel
OK
•
Hysteresis
Hysteresis is understood to mean the changed onset of the
switching effect between the ”On” and ”Off” states. The hysteresis
prevents ”fluttering” of the limit switch when the switching level is
reached.
F-9
•
Direction
Input the operating direction of the limit switch.
a) Switching when Over the switching level limit
Level
Hysteresis
Amplifier output signal
Limit switch On
Limit switch Off
1
0
LED
LED
b) Switching when Below the switching level limit
Hysteresis
Level
1
Limit switch On
Limit switch Off
0
•
LED
LED
Limit switch delay
You can enter a limit switch delay time of 0 − 99999 ms.
Switch at Delay time of 60 ms
30ms
Level
Hysteresis
1
0
60 ms
Delay time
F-10
The limit switch should only operate if the signal has been above
the level for a long time (here 60 ms). The limit switch should not
operate if the signal has only been above the level for a short time
(here 30ms).
•
Output logic
You can change the output logic of the remotes as required.
Positive logic
Negative logic
On =High
On =Low
Off=Low
Off=High
•
Input
Enable or disable use of function keys to input limit switches.
•
Message when ON
Edit field for a message that will be displayed when switching to on
(e.g. ”below 20kg”, see also the figure on page F-14). You may also
select the display mode (Standard=black font on a light
background; Inverse=light font on a dark background).
•
Message when OFF
Edit field for a message that will be displayed when switching to off
(e.g. ”below 20kg”). You may also select the display mode
(Standard=black font on a light background; Inverse=light font on a
dark background).
F-11
2.3
Limit switch 1
Limit switches
Name
Enable
Input signal
On level
Off level
Input
Hysteresis
Selection keys in the menu Limit switches
NOTE
Channel 1
1 ....
It may be an advantage to use the horizontal cursor keys when
enabling. As soon as you have entered your set-up in the required
1-Limit1 ...
No ↓
selection box or edit field (in this case Enable), confirm it with
Gross ↓
10.000 ...
9.9000 ...
disabled ↓
variable ↓
V
V
(Edit fields)
and press
. By doing this you stay in the required selection
box (edit field), but skip to the next limit switch.
F-12
Additional functions Ý Combine limit switches
3
Combine limit switches (one-channel modules
only)
Using this function you can logically combine selected limit switches to
a limit switch output.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
•
•
Combine LIV
•
Combine LIV
LIV output:
Comb.:
Input 1:
Input 2:
Input 3:
Input 4:
Channel 1
3
AND ↓
LIV 1 ↓
LIV 2 ↓
−−−
−−−
−−−−
LIV 4
LIV 4 inverted
Remote contact 4
Remote contact 4 inverted
AND
OR
EXOR
NAND
NOR
NEXOR
−−−
1
2
3
4
LIV output
Input the required limit switch output (−−−, 1, 2, 3, 4).
Comb.
Logical combination of the input signals (AND, OR, EXOR, NAND,
NOR, NEXOR).
Input 1...4
Choose the inputs to be combined (Limit1 (LIV1) to Limit4 (LIV4) or
remote contact).
F-13
Limit switch 1
Limit switches
Example:
Channel 1
1
Task: To monitor the range between 10 kN and 20 kN, and evaluate it
as ”OK”. The evaluation will be displayed as ”OK” or ”NOK”.
Name
1-Limit1
Enable
Input signal
Level
Yes↓
10,000 ...
kN
Hysteresis
0.010 ...
kN
Direction
Output logic
Over limit ↓
Solution: Limit switch 1 monitors the 10 kN limit, whilst limit switch 2
monitors the 20 kN limit. Both are combined to one another by ”AND”.
The result from this combination controls the output of limit switch 3.
Gross ↓
Positiv logic ↓
kN
Delay
define...
Input
Message when ON
free ↓
Over 10kN...
Normal ↓
Message when OFF
Under 10kN...
Invers↓
20
OK
Limit switch 2
Limit switches
Channel 1
10
2...
Name
1-Limit2 ...
Enable
Input signal
Level
Yes↓
20,000...
kN
Hysteresis
0.010 ...
kN
Direction
Output logic
Below limit ↓
Delay
define...
Input
Message when ON
free ↓
Below 20kN ...
Normal ↓
Message when OFF
Over 20kN...
Invers↓
Gross ↓
1
0
Negative logic ↓
Limit switch 3
Limit switches
t
Channel 1
1
0
1
0
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
3
Name
1-Limit3
Enable
Input signal
Level
Yes↓
0,000 ...
kN
Hysteresis
0.010 ...
kN
Direction
Output logic
Over limit ↓
Gross ↓
Positiv logic ↓
Delay
define...
Input
Message when ON
free ↓
OK
Normal ↓
Message when OFF
NOK
Invers↓
F-14
Combine LIV
LIV output:
Comb.:
Input 1:
Input 2:
Input 3:
Input 4:
Channel 1
If limit switch 1 is undershot, the settings shown in this example give
rise to the following display (screen type ”7Status limit switch”):
3
AND ↓
LIV 1 ↓
LIV 2 ↓
−−−
−−−
LIMIT VALUE
1−ML30B
Gross
8.483 kN
1−Limit
Below 10kN
1
1−Limit
Below 20kN
2
1−Limit
NOK
3
Measure
F-15
Additional functions Ý Adjusting peak values
4
Adjusting peak values
4.1
Peak value stores
Measured
peak value
You can use the ’Peak values’ function to record and save isolated
signal peaks and minimum/maximum signal amplitudes. All amplifiers
have two peak value stores each.
You can use these to save:
26 µsec
−
Maxima
−
Minima or
−
Peak-to-peak amplitudes
Gross
Peak value stores
Net
(envelope)
Display
Peak−to−peak
In the case of rapid dynamic signals, you must taken into account that
the peak values are defined in a fixed time raster. If filter cut-off
frequencies are set up > 5 Hz Bessel or 10 Hz Butterworth, the raster is
scanned 38400 times per second, corresponding to 26 µsec.
The peak value stores are abbreviated to Store1 and Store2 in the
set-up windows because this form of notation is shorter.
Setting up peak value stores
From the ”Function” selection fields, select the minimum or maximum
signal for which you want the peak value to be saved.
In the ”Envelope” selection fields, switch on the envelope function. In
the right-hand edit field, enter the decay time in milliseconds.
F-16
4.2
Combine peak value stores
Combine peak value stores
Gross
System
Display
Amplifier
Net
Options
Store1
Store12
Store2
Peak value stores
Peak value stores (PVS)
Channel 1
Maximum gross ↓
Store1 Function
Store1 Envelope curve
Off ↓
0 ... ms
Store2 Function
Maximum gross ↓
Off ↓
0 ... ms
Store 2 Envelope curve
−−−
Comb. PVS 1−2
There are four possible ways to combine peak value stores:
1. Difference generation:
Store1 − Store2 (used as Peak/Peak).
F
Store1
Off
On
−−−
Difference PVS1, PVS2
Mean PVS1,PVS2
Integrate gross
Integrate net
Signal curve
Maximum, gross
Maximum gross
Maximum net
Minimum gross
Minimum net
Peak-to-peak value
t
Minimum, gross
Fig.4.1:
Peak value combination when calculating difference
Store2
F-17
2. Mean generation:
(PVS1PVS2)
2
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
F
Store1
Peak value stores
Mean value
Store2
Store1 Function
Store2 Function
Comb. PVS 1−2
Channel 1
t
Maximum gross ↓
Off ↓
0 ...
ms
Fig.4.2:
Maximum gross ↓
Off ↓
0 ...
Peak value combination when calculating mean value
ms
3. Integrate gross:
−−−
∑ B/n
n = number of points
Off
On
−−−
Mean PVS1,PVS2
Integrate gross
Integrate net
B = gross signal
Maximum gross
Maximum net
Minimum gross
Minimum net
4. Integrate net:
∑ N/n
N = gross signal
n = number of points
The mean value of the gross/net signal is generated for your choice
of time interval. The values are added at a sample rate of 1200 Hz
(for filter frequencies >5 Hz: Bessel; >10 Hz: Butterworth).
You can allocate a F-key (function Start/Stop integration; see page
G-25) or use a remote contact (INT) to set the start/end of
integration.
F-18
4.3
Controlling the peak value store
Three remote contacts have an effect on the peak value store:
CPV:
HLD:
INT:
Used to clear the peak value store
Freezes or unfreezes the current contents of the memory
Starts and stops integration for a particular time interval
You can use these remote control elements to carry out other functions, such as storing current values.
F-19
4.4
Vi, Vo
”Peak value” operating mode
Output
Measurement
signal
In ”Peak value” operating mode you can save the minimum value, the
peak value or the peak-to-peak value (function ”Run”). Use the ”Hold”
function to hold the contents of the store.
For all connection boards except AP13i
Function
Operating
mode
Run
Peak value
t
Hold
Run
Current value
Function
Control circuit for CPV
Peak/Current value
Control circuit for HLD
Run/Hold
Peak value:
Memory runs in chosen
direction
5V
5V
Freeze value
Any
0V
Function
Peak/Current value
Control circuit for HLD
Run/Hold
Peak value: Memory
runs in chosen direction
0V
0V
Freeze value
Any
24 V
For connection boards AP13i
F-20
4.5
”Current value” operating mode
Measurement signal
Vi, Vo
Output
In ”Current value” operating mode, the memory is constantly updated
(function ”Run”). Use the ”Hold” function to hold the contents of the
store. You can use the remote contacts to switch the peak value store
to current value operating mode.
For all connection boards except AP13i
t
Function
Operating
mode
Run
Hold
Current value
Function
Control circuit
Peak/Current value
Control circuit
Run/Hold
Current value: Memory
runs in each direction
0V
5V
Freeze value
Any
0V
Function
Peak/Current value
Control circuit
Run/Hold
Current value: Memory
runs in each direction
24 V
0V
Freeze value
Any
24 V
Run
For connection boards AP13i
F-21
4.6
”Envelope curve” operating mode
Output signal
100%
30%
Input signal
Time constant
Time constant: OK
Peak value stores can also be used to provide an envelope display. The
envelope function is suitable for measuring amplitude modulated
vibration. Inputting a decay time defines how quickly the peak value
store is discharged to 30 % of the peak value when the latter is no
longer present at memory input. The choice of decay time depends on
the basic vibration frequency f0 and the modulation frequency. Usable
envelopes are obtained in most cases with a decay time which is about
a multiple of 10 of the basic frequency period (t= 10 / f0).
Time constant: too long
Time constant: too short
F-22
4.7
Clear peak value store
The peak value stores are abbreviated to Store1 and Store2 in the
set-up windows because this form of notation is shorter.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
There are three ways in which you can clear a peak value store:
1. By means of a function key (factory setting
/level3).
Peak value stores
2. With the remote contacts CPV1/CPV2 (in the pull-up menu
”Amplifier”/ set-up window ”Switch”, ”ON” must be selected in the
Remote selection field).
Store1 Function
Store2 Function
Comb. PVS 1−2
Channel 1
Maximum gross ↓
Off ↓
0 ...
ms
Maximum gross ↓
Off ↓
0 ...
ms
−−−
Off
On
−−−
Mean PVS1,PVS2
Integrate gross
Integrate net
Maximum gross
Maximum net
Minimum gross
Minimum net
3. From a computer, with the command ”CPV”.
F-23
Additional functions Ý Version
5
Version
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
You may use the channel selection keys to display information about
the version of your device components one after another. In the header
on the right is the name of the device components (e.g. AB, CP,
Channel 1, etc.) and their version is displayed. The first line of the box
below gives information on device identification and the second line
gives the serial number.
You may enter any text you wish in the comment line.
Version
Version
KANAL 1
Identification:
Comments:
HBM, RD002−ML50B, P4.0A
...
Serial and revisionnumber
ML801B
Serial No.
xxxx
Rev.No.
xxxx
F-24
Additional functions Ý Switch
6
Switch
The first things you find in the ”Switch” set-up window are three buttons,
which you can use for
−>T<−
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
−>0<−
You can use the selection fields that come after, to switch between the
possible states of the functions Autocalibration, Parameter set,
Amplifier input, Remote and Channel-LED.
Channel 1
−>T<−
Autocal
−>0<−
Autocal
Off ↓
Param.set
1−internal ↓
Ampl. Input
Zero ↓
Remote control
zero balancing
clearing the peak value store.
Switch
Switch
taring
Off ↓
Channel−LED Status ↓
Switching automatic calibration on and off. When AUTOCAL is ”On”,
this improves the temperature tracking of zero point and the long term
stability of the amplifier. If you need the analogue output signal for
continuous monitoring, you must switch autocalibration off. This is
because during calibration no data is acquired, giving rise to a ”gap” in
the measurement output (at intervals of approx. 5 minutes, lasting
about 1 second, depending on the filter setting.
Parameter set
Selecting stored parameter sets (see also H-9).
Ampl. Input
Zero:
Zero signal; input internal to zero potential
Cal:
Calibration signal
Measure:
The current measurement signal is present at the input
Shunt:
Shunt resistor on (shunt calibration)
F-25
Switch
Remote control
Channel 1
−>T<−
Switching Remote on/off (activates the remote contacts)
−>0<−
Param.set
Off ↓
Remote control Off ↓
1−internal ↓
Ampl. Input
Zero ↓
Autocal
Off
5 Min
once
Channel−LED
Channel−LED Status ↓
This switches the function of the LEDs on the front panel of the
amplifier.
Status:
Status display (Amplifier active, Error, Limit switches)
Zero
Cal
Measure
1−internal
2−internal
3−internal
4−internal
5−internal
6−internal
7−internal
8−internal
Status
Level
Level:
Amplifier level control coefficient
Off
On
F-26
G-1
G
Display
G-2
G-3
Display Ý Display format
1
Display format
1 value
Gross
Channel
The settings determine how the selected signals are displayed. You can
basically select four different signals (Gross, Net, Limit switches, Peak
values) per channel.
Measure
Measure
Values can be represented numerically or graphically. A maximum of
six values can be displayed simultaneously in numerical representation.
Acal
3 values
Gross
The display states shown on the left are described as types and can be
selected from the setup menu.
Gross
Gross
Measure
6 values
Acal
Representation as a numerical value
Gross
Gross
Gross
Gross
Gross
Gross
Acal
Measure
•
1 value (with/without status line)
•
3 values
•
6 values
Graphical representation
YT-Diagram
Gross
•
YT-Diagram
•
XY-Diagram
XY-Diagram
Gross
Gross
Display four limit switch states
•
Status limit switch
Status limit switch
Limit switch
1−ML30B
Gross
1−Limit1
Below 10kN
1−Limit2
Below 20kN
1−Limit3
NOK
Acal
Measure
8.483 kN
Display with ”Data acquisition” type
Recording status
Test sequence 3
•
Pre trigger status
•
Post trigger status
MEAS. RATE: 50Hz
PERIODS: 100
TIME: 00: 00: 00
1
16.0S
−4.0S
Get DAQ1
Acal
120 MB FREE
... ...
G-4
1.1
Select set-up window
2. Press
System
Display
Amplifier
.
Options
3. Select ”Display format” from the pull-up menu and confirm with
You are now in the ”Display format” set-up window.
Display format
F-keys
Channel names
Display Format
Screen No:
Type:
one value
0 ...
one value ↓
Channels/Signals: all ↓
Off ↓
Status line
define...
.
G-5
1.2
Set-up window Display format
Display format
The structure of the ”Display format” set-up window depends on the
selected Type. The window mask changes according to the selected
Type. For instance the ”Status line” selection field is only present for the
”1 value” type.
one value
0 ...
one value ↓
Screen No:
Type:
Off ↓
Status line
define...
Off
On
Display format
Menu for ”1 value” type
all
Selection
free
One value
3 values
6 values
YT-Diagram
XY-Diagram Limit_V. status
Status data acquisition
Display format
Channel
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
define...
3 values
0 ...
Screen No:
Type:
3 values ↓
Value 1 (Base):
Select channel/signal
Cancel
Off ↓
Status line
0...9
Menu for ”3 values” type
OK
one value
0 ...
one value ↓
Screen No:
Type:
All channels
All signals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
Channels/Signals: Selection↓
Value 2:
Value 3:
define...
relativ to base ↓
Channel 2
Signal Gross ↓
relativ to base ↓
Channel −1
Signal Gross ↓
G-6
1.3
Set-up window components
Dsplay format
Number
one value
You can enter the numbers 1...9 in this edit field. In this way you can
store your current display settings under a number or recall the factory
presets. In the same way you can determine the sequence in which the
0 ...
one value ↓
Screen No:
Type:
Off ↓
Status line
define...
types are selected in measuring mode with the
Off
On
The following sequence is preset at the factory:
Number
all
Selection
free
One value
3 values
6 values
YT-Diagram
XY-Diagram
Limit_V. status
0...9
OK
Channel
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
Cancel
−cursor keys.
All channels
All signals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
Type
Channels/Signals
Status line
0
1 value
All
On
1
3 values
All
−
2
6 values
All
−
3
YT-Diagram
All
−
4
XY-Diagram
All
−
5
Status limit switch
−
−
6
DAQ status
−
−
7
Free
−
−
8
Free
−
−
9
Free
−
−
Type
Use the Type to define the number of measurement signals that can be
displayed simultaneously (numerical value only) or the representation
mode (graphic only) in the display. You can also display the status of
four selected limit switches.
G-7
1.3.1 Numerical display
Display format
Channels/Signals
3 values
At this point you define which channels and signals are to be shown on
the first display line. You can define your settings for all channels or just
for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define...
). You can recall a
maximum of six signals per channel one after the other.
0 ...
Screen No:
Type:
3 values ↓
Value 1 (Base):
Value 2:
none
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
as base
define...
relativ to base ↓
Channel 2
Signal Gross ↓
0...9
0...9
all
Selection
Absolute
relativ to base
At this point, 3/6 values types are used to define the basic channels
(Value 1).
Define...
The key symbol opens a new window Select channel/signal.
Status line
Free
One value
3 values
6 values
YT-Diagram
XY-Diagram
With the ”1 value” type, the status line can be superimposed on the
display.
Value1 (”Base”)
OK
Channel
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
Cancel
All channels
All signals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
6 values
3 values
Gross
Gross
Gross
Measure
Gross
Gross
Gross
Gross
Gross
Gross
Measure
G-8
Value (2...6): Channel
The value entered depends on the ”absolute/relative” selection.
This setting lets you use ”3 values” and ”6 values” types to define which
reference to the basic channel is produced.
Absolute/relativ to base
This setting lets you use ”3 values” and ”6 values” types to define
whether a reference to the channel number of the basic channel is
produced.
Absolute: The measured value and signal of the selected channel are
displayed independently of the basic value. The number entered
corresponds to the actual channel number. Changing channels in
measuring mode has no effect on this display value.
relativ to base: The number entered refers to the basic channel
(display value 1). Channels to the left of the basic channel are entered
with a negative sign and those to the right of it are entered with a
positive sign.
Caution: This value does not correspond to the actual (absolute)
channel number.
G-9
Set-up window
Display format
0 ...
Screen No:
Type:
3 values ↓
OK
Value 1 (Base):
define...
Value 2:
relativ to base ↓
Channel −1
Signal Gross ↓
Value 3:
relativ to base ↓
Channel 2
Signal Gross ↓
Basic channel C3
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
(−)
Channel
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
Cancel
All channels
All signals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
4
4
4
MGCplus device
(+)
−1
Display
+2
Channel 3
Net
Value 1
Channel 2
Gross
Value 2
Channel 5
Gross
Value 3
Basic value
G-10
DISPLAY FORMAT
3 values
0 ...
Screen No:
Type:
The setting in the ”Channels/Signals” selection field and the relative
channel number affect the sequence of the values displayed in
measuring mode.
3 values ↓
Value 1 (Base):
Value 2:
Value 3:
define...
relativ to base ↓
Channel 2
Signal Gross ↓
−1
Example 1: 6-channel module; ”3 values” type
relativ to base ↓
Channel
Signal Gross ↓
a) Channels/Signals: + All
The channel selection keys
are used to select all channels in turn,
starting with the basic channel.
Display
Basic value
C3 Value 1
Value 2: Channel+2 rel. C5 Value 2
Value 3: Channel −1 rel. C2 Value 3
C6
C2
C5
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
C4
C6
C3
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
C5
C1
C4
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
C1
C3
C6
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
C2
C4
C1
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Use the cursor keys
(SIGNAL) to display all signals from the
basic channel that were set up in the ”Select channel/signal” menu.
G-11
Display format
3 values
0 ...
Screen No:
Type:
b) Channels/Signals: + select
3 values ↓
Value 1 (Base):
Example 1 (Continued): 6-channel unit; ”3 values” type
The channel selection keys
are used in measuring mode to select
define...
Value 2:
relativ to base ↓
Channel 2
Signal Gross ↓
Value 3:
relativ to base ↓
Channel −1
Signal Gross ↓
the required channels for the basic channel (in this example 1, 3, 5) one
after the other. The display fields of non-selected channels stay blank.
C3
Value 2: Channel+2 C5
Value 3: Channel −1 C2
Display
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
C5
Value 1
C4
Value 3
C1
C3
Value 1
Value 2
Use the cursor keys
(SIGNAL) in measuring mode displays all
signals from the basic channel that were set up in the ”Select
channel/signal” menu (in the first display line).
affects
Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
affects
Channel
Channel
Channel
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
G-12
Display format
Example 2: The net weights of three containers are to be displayed
simultaneously. The following assignment is to apply:
3 values
0 ...
Screen No:
Type:
Container 1 → Channel 1
3 values ↓
Value 1 (Base):
Value 2:
Value 3:
Channel
Signal
2
Channel
Signal
3
define...
absolute ↓
Net ↓
absolute ↓
Net ↓
First of all the channel names are specified.
2. Press
.
3. Select ”Channel names” from the pull-up menu
and confirm with
.
4. Enter CONTAINER 1 in the ”Channel 1” edit field
and confirm with
.
and confirm with
.
and confirm with
7. Press
.
.
8. Select ”Display format” from the pull-up menu
and confirm with
9. Use
to select 3 VALUES from the ”Type” selection field and
confirm with
.
.
G-13
10. Use
to choose Selection from the ”Channels/Signals” selection
field and confirm with
.
11. Use
to choose the ”define...” symbol and confirm with
12. Use
to choose the ”Channel1/Net” control field and confirm with
.
(the control field displays n).
13. Use
14. Use
to choose the ”Value2:Channel” edit field and enter 2.
15. Select the ”Absolute/relative” selection field with
”absolute” and confirm with
16. Use
.
.
to choose the ”Value3:Channel” edit field and enter 3.
18. Select the ”Absolute/relative” selection field with
”absolute” and confirm with
19. Use
, select
to choose the ”Signal” selection field, select ”Net” and
confirm with
17. Use
.
, select
.
to choose the ”Signal” selection field, select ”Net” and
confirm with
.
To return to measuring mode, press the shift key
security prompt with
and confirm the
.
G-14
Example 3: One force and one path are to be measured on each of
two presses. The following assignment is to apply:
Force on press 1
→
Channel 1
Path for press 1
→
Channel 2
Force on press 2
→
Channel 3
Path for press 2
→
Channel 4
A display with three values is required, for which a comparison of the
same signals will have to be made between press 1 and press 2.
Path P1
Store1
Path P2
Store1
Force P1
Store1
Force P2
Store1
Force P1
Store2
Force P2
Store2
First of all the channel names are specified.
CHANNEL NAMES
Channel1:
Channel 2:
Channel 3:
Channel 4:
Channel 5:
Channel 6:
Force P1
Path P1
Force P2
Path P2
2. Press
.
3. Select ”Channel names” from the pull-up menu
and confirm with
.
.
4. Enter FORCE P1 in the ”Channel 1” edit field and confirm with
5. Enter PATH P1 in the ”Channel 2” edit field and confirm with
.
G-15
Channel names
6. Enter FORCE P2 in the ”Channel 3” edit field and confirm with
Channel 1:
Channel 2:
Channel 3:
Channel 4:
7. Enter PATH P2 in the ”Channel 4” edit field and confirm with
Force P1
Path P1
Force P2
Path P2
Display format
3 values
1
Screen No:
Type:
8. Press
.
.
.
9. Select ”Display format” from the pull-up menu and confirm with
3 values ↓
.
Value 1 (Base):
Value 2:
Value 3:
Channel
Signal
2
Channel
Signal
3
define...
Channel
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
Cancel
.
absolute ↓
Net ↓
11. Use
absolute ↓
12. Use
All channels
to select 3 VALUES from the ”Type” selection field and
confirm with
Net ↓
OK
10. Enter 1 in the ”Number” edit field and confirm with
All signals
.
to choose select from the ”Display format :
Channels/Signals” selection field and confirm with
.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
4
4
13. Use
to choose the ”define...” symbol and confirm with
14. Use
to choose the ”Channel2/Store1” control field and confirm
with
15. Use
with
16. Use
.
to choose the ”Channel4/Store1” control field and confirm
.
G-16
Display Format
3 values
3 values ↓
18. Use
Value 1 (Base):
Value 2:
Value 3:
17. Enter −1 in the ”Value 2: Channel” edit field and confirm with
.
1
Screen No:
Type:
Channel
Signal
−1
Channel
Signal
−1
define...
to select relative from the ”absolute/relative” selection field
and confirm with
.
relative ↓
Store1 ↓
relative ↓
Store2 ↓
19. Use
to select Store1 from the ”Signal” selection field and
confirm with
.
20. Enter −1 in the ”Value 3: Channel” edit field and confirm with
21. Use
to select relative from the ”absolute/relative” selection field
and confirm with
22. Use
.
to select Store2 from the ”Signal” selection field and
confirm with
23. Press shift key
.
.
and confirm the security prompt with
.
G-17
1.3.2 Graphic display
YT-Diagram
Type YT-Diagram
This diagram is used to examine changes in measured values over
time.
Gross
Sampling rate
Signal sampling interval.
Channels/Signals
Set-up window
Display Format
YT-Diagram
Screen No:
Type:
0 ...
YT-Diagram ↓
Sampling rate
1s↓
At this point you define which channels and signals are to be
represented in the display. You can define your settings for all channels
or just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define...
). You can
recall a maximum of six signals per channel one after the other.
Define...
YMax
100...
%
YMin
−100...
%
define...
G-18
YMax
Set-up window
Display format
YT-Diagram
Maximum display value by reference to present Range 1 (in %).
Screen No:
Type:
0 ...
YT-Diagram ↓
YMin
Sampling rate
1s↓
Minimum display value by reference to present Range 1 (in %).
define...
YMax
100...
%
YMin
−100...
%
Present channel Present measurement signalPresent value
YMax
Gross
Zero point
y-Raster
1 division
YMin
y-Raster
Scale
Time raster Time raster
1 division Scale
G-19
XY-Diagram
Type XY-Diagram
Gross
Sampling rate
Gross
Signal sampling interval.
Channels/Signals
At this point you define which channels and signals are to be
represented in the display. You can define your settings for all channels
). You can
or just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define...
Define...
Setup menu
Screen
DisplayNo:
format
XY-Diagram
Type:
0 ...
XY-Diagram ↓
Sampling rate:
1s↓
Value 1 (Base):
Value 2:
define...
XMax
100...
%
XMin
−100...
%
Channel
Signal
2
absolute ↓
Net ↓
YMax
100...
%
YMin
−100...
%
G-20
YMax
Setup menu
Display format
XY-Diagram
Screen No:
Type:
0 ...
XY-Diagram ↓
Sampling rate:
1s↓
YMin
Value 1 (Base):
Value 2:
define...
XMax
100...
%
XMin
−100...
%
Channel
Signal
absolute ↓
2
Maximum value on the vertical axis by reference to the present
measuring range (%).
Net ↓
YMax
100...
%
YMin
−100...
%
Minimum value on the vertical axis by reference to the present
XMax
Maximum value on the horizontal axis by reference to the present
XMin
Minimum value on the horizontal axis by reference to the present
Present channel Present measurement signal
x-Raster
Gross
Scale
YMax
y-Raster 1 division
x-Raster
1 division
YMin
XMin
Gross
XMax
Present
value (x)
y-Raster
Scale
Present
value (y)
G-21
1.4
Status limit switch
Type: Status limit switch
Title
Any user-specific name; it appears in the header (factory setting ”Limit
switch”).
Title
LIMIT SWITCH
1−ML30B
Gross
1−Limit1
Below 10kN
1−Limit2
Below 20kN
1−Limit3
NOK
8.483 kN
Status line 1 (base): channel
At this point you define which channels and signals are to be displayed
on the first status line. You can define your settings for all channels or
). You can
just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define...
Measure
Set-up window
Display format
Status limit switch
Screen No:
Type:
0 ...
Status limit switch ↓
Title
Limit switch
Status line 1 (base):
define...
Status line 2:
Channel 2
LV
1↓
relativ to base ↓
Status line 3:
Channel 2
1↓
LV
absolute ↓
Status line 4:
Channel 2
LV
1↓
absolute ↓
Define...
The key symbol opens new Menu Select channel/signal.
Absolute/relativ to base
This setting lets you define whether a reference to the basic channel is
produced.
Absolute: The measured value and signal of the selected channel are
displayed independently of the basic value. The number entered
corresponds to the actual channel number. Changing channels has no
effect.
Relativ to base: The number entered refers to the basic channel. The
basic channel number is 0. Channels to the left of the basic channel are
entered with a negative sign and those to the right of it are entered with
a positive sign. Caution: This value does not correspond to the actual
(absolute) channel number!
NOTE
Enter the description of the limit switches in the menu.
Options
Limit switches
G-22
1.5
Type: Status data acquisition
Bar chart
This diagram shows the current state of data acquisition.
Data acquisition comment
Data acquisition
comment
Bar chart
Test sequence 3
MEAS. RATE: 50Hz
PERIODS: 100
TIME: 00: 00: 00
1
−4.0S
16.0S
Get DAQ1
120 MB FREE
Acal
User note (e.g. measurement sequence number).
Measuring rate
The current measuring rate for all the defined channels is shown here.
Time
Time elapsed since the start of the period.
Periods
Number of periods.
File name
Pre trigger
Post trigger
Name of the stored file. When you restart the program, the file is not
overwritten, instead the counter (last four places) is incremented.
xxx MB FREE:
Current period
Shows the amount of free memory on the hard disk.
NOTE
The MGCplus computer detects when the storage capacity on the
hard disk falls below 1 MB. In this case, data acquisition is
cancelle0d and the file is closed.
G-23
Display Ý F-keys
2
F-keys
2.1
F-keys in measuring mode
F-keys − Level 1
Function keys F1...F4 operate in both measuring mode and set-up
mode.
Gross
Channel
Measure
−> 0 <−
−> T <−
1st level
−II−
F-keys − Level 2
Acal
Measure
Unit
...
F-keys − Level 3
Rem/Loc
Limit_V
In measuring mode you can switch between a total of 9 functions on
three levels:
Start/Stop
F-key field
...
...
•
F1
Zeroing
•
F2
Tare
•
F3
2nd level
•
F1
Autocalibration
•
F2
Ident (import transducer characteristics)
•
F3
Switch display unit (see also page E-16)
3rd level
•
F1
Remote on/off
•
F2
LIV level
•
F3
Start/Stop
Key assignment is freely selectable. The assignment listed above is the
factory setting. Key F4 toggles between factory setting and the next
level (...F-level).
You can make the effect of functions apply to all channels or restrict it to
one (of those selected).
In measuring mode the current key assignment is displayed in the lower
display line for all screen types. If you have set the function for all
channels, this is indicated by the ... symbol in the upper right corner
of the F-key field.
G-24
Display Ý F-keys
Function
Effect
Tare
Taring is triggered.
Zeroing
A zero balance is carried out.
Clear stores
Clears the peak value store
Zero/Cal/Measure
Switches between the zero signal, the calibration signal and the measurement signal.
Autocal
Autocalibration is switched on or off.
LED Status/Level
Switches between the “Status” and “Level” LED displays.
LIV level
Call the ”LIV level” menu.
Remote/Local
Remote On/Off.
Shunt On/Off
Switches shunt (transducer, AP14) on or off.
Start/Stop display
The measured value currently being displayed is ”frozen” in the indicator (pause function).
Print display
Prints the current display (except for graphics).
Print values
Prints the current measured values.
Print setup
Prints the stored parameter sets.
Load next P-set
Reads the next parameter set from the amplifier(s) (1 to 8).
Load previous P-set
Reads the previous parameter set from the amplifier(s) (1 to 8).
Switch display unit
Switches between the native unit (mV/V), the user-defined unit (for instance kg) and the analogue output
(V).
Start/Stop integration
Integration of peak values is switched on or off.
Start/Stop data acquis.
Data acquisition is switched on or off.
Load data acquis. set
Reads parameter sets from RAM (parameter set 0) or the hard disk (parameter sets 1 to 16).
Load DAQ comments
Reads data acquisition comments from hard disk.
Linearization on/off
Linearization of the transducers characteristic on/off
Ident
Imports transducer characteristic data
Tab 2.1:
Function key shortcuts
G-25
Display Ý F-keys
Select setup window
Set-up window
F-Keys setup
Level 1
Level
1 ...
F1: Tare ↓
F2: Zero/Cal/Measure ↓ One channel
F3: Autocal ↓
One channel
F4: ...F-level
One channel ↓
2. Press
.
3. Select ”F-keys” from the pop-up menu and confirm with
.
You are now in the ”F-keys” set-up window.
1
2
3
not assigned
Tare
Zeroing
Clear stores
Zero/Cal/Measure
Autocal
LED Status/Level
LIV level
Remote/Local
Shunt On/Off
Start/Stop display
Print display
Print values
Print setup
Load from XM001
Load next P-set
Load previous P-set
Switch display unit
Load DAQ param. set
Load DAQ comments
One channel
All channels
G-26
2.2
Password
Save/Load
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
Display
System
Display Ý F-keys
F-keys in set-up mode
In set-up mode use the function keys to call the pull-up menus from
the menu bar.
Amplifier
Options
G-27
Display Ý Channel names
3
Channel names
Select set-up window
Set-up window
Channel name
Channel 3.1
2. Press
to go to setup mode
.
3. Select ”Channel names” from the pull-up menu and confirm with
Channel name:
System
.
Force ...
Display
Amplifier
Options
In the set-up window all existing channels have the factory specified
channel names in the first instance.
(e.g.: Empty edit fields indicate free card slots on your unit.)
NOTE
If you wish to apply a new description to an edit field that has
already been described, you can delete the whole of the old entry
using the clear key
.
G-28
Display Ý Channel names
H-1
H
System
H-2
H-3
System Ý Password
1
Password
You can protect all the settings on your unit with a password. In factory setting this password protection is disabled.
Once password protection is activated, the password must be entered each time Setup mode is called (and whenever the unit is switched on again). Only then can the settings be changed. There is no need to enter a password
just for measuring mode.
Access authorisation is linked to the password:
•
System (all settings can be changed)
•
Operator (only enabled settings can be changed)
You can define a password and access authorisation for a maximum of nine users.
Important: When the equipment is in ex-factory status, password protection cannot be enabled until a new user
with ”System” access authorisation has been defined.
H-4
System Ý Password
1.1
Define new user
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
2. Press
to go to setup mode
.
3. Select ”Password” from the pull-up menu and confirm with
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
4. Select the ”new” key symbol with
Interface
Print
and confirm with
.
6. Select the ”Password” edit field with
confirm with
Password
new...
Password:
change...
Access:
set...
delete...
User:
Password:
Access:
OK
Operator
Cancel
Operator
System
, enter your password and
.
7. Choose the ”Access:” selection field with
access authorisation and confirm with
8. Select the ”OK” key symbol with
Add user
.
5. Enter the new user names in the ”User:” edit field and confirm with
Language
Time
User:
.
, select the required
.
and confirm with
.
H-5
System Ý Password
1.2
Enable password protection
If you are already in the ”Password” setup window, go straight to
point 4.
Password
User:
new...
Password:
change...
Access:
set...
delete...
2. Press
.
4. Select the ”set......” key symbol with
.
and confirm with
.
Authorisation of the operator
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
Time
Display format
F-keys
Channel names
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue output
Switch
Remote contacts
Limit switches
Tie limit switches
Peak value stores
Version
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
OK
Cancel
.
5. Press
Off ↓
Password protection
6. Use
to choose selection field ”Password protection”
confirm with
Off
On
On
and
.
If the error message ”No user with System access” is displayed at this
point, press the Cancel key
Off
and press to select
to delete the error message. Use
again. Press
twice. You are now in
the ”PASSWORD” setup window. Now define a user with system
privileges, as described in Chap.1.1.
7. Press
with
(which takes you straight to the OK key) and confirm
.
H-6
System Ý Password
1.3
Set operator access
Password
User:
new...
Password:
change...
Access:
set...
delete...
point 4.
2. Press
to go to setup mode
.
4. Select the ”set...” key symbol with
and confirm with
.
.
Off ↓
Password protection
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
Time
Display format
F-keys
Channel names
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue output
Switch
Remote contacts
Limit switches
Tie limit switches
Peak value stores
Version
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
OK
Cancel
and confirm
5. Choose the required ”No/Yes” selection field with
with
.
6. Select the required set-up with
7. Press
with
and confirm with
.
.
.
and confirm the
H-7
System Ý Password
1.4
Delete user
point 4.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
2. Press
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
.
Interface
Print
You are now in the ”Password” setup window.
Language
Time
4. Select the ”delete...” key symbol with
5. Use
and confirm with
.
.
to select the ”delete...” key symbol next to the required
Password
User:
new...
Password:
change...
Access:
set...
delete...
user and confirm with
6. Press
with
.
.
Delete user
User1:
Miller
delete
User2:
Morgan
delete
delete
User3:
OK
Cancel
H-8
System Ý Password
1.5
Change password
point 4.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
to go to setup mode
2. Press
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
You are now in the ”Password” setup window.
Language
Time
4. Select the ”change...” key symbol with
.
and confirm with
5. Enter the password in the ”New password” edit field and confirm
Password
with
User:
new...
Password:
change...
Access:
set...
Change password
New password:
OK
Cancel
.
delete...
6. Press
with
.
.
System ➝ Save/Load
H-9
2
Save/Load
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
With the ”Save/Load” function you can save the current set-ups for the
AB22A/AB32/CP42 or the amplifier plug-in modules (up to 8 parameter
sets per channel), or load saved setups. You may use ”Factory setting”
to load the ex-factory settings as delivered.
You may even copy settings from one amplifier to another.
Password
Save/Load
Data acquisition
Volatile memory (8h)
Interface
Print
Language
RAM
save
Factory setting
Time
load
EPROM
Save/Load setup
save
load
Factory setting
Internal EEPROM
(8 parameter sets)
Permanent save
Copy
OK
Load parameter
Channel
Param.set
CP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
1 1 1
Automatically from disk
1
OK
Cancel
Save parameter
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
Channel
Param.set
1 1 1
CP
1
OK
Cancel
H-10
Save parameter
to go to setup mode
2. Press
3. Select ”Save/Load” from the pull-up menu and confirm with
.
This takes you to the ”Save/Load setup” set-up window.
4. In the ”Copy from channel” edit field, use
to choose the ”save”
.
5. In the ”Param.set” check box, specify the channel number of the
parameter set under which you want your settings to be saved and
confirm with
.
symbol ”OK” and confirm with
.
.
to select the key
and confirm the
H-11
Load parameter
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
2. Press
Password
Save/Load
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
to choose the ”load”
.
5. In the ”Param.set” check box, specify under the channel number the
parameter set with the settings you want to load and confirm with
Save/Load setup
save
Time
.
load
Factory setting
.
Copy
OK
to select the key
.
Load parameter
Channel
Param.set
CP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
1 1 1
and confirm the
1
OK
Cancel
.
3
When the MGCplus is powered up or the hard disk is connected, the
amplifier settings that are stored on the PCMCIA hard disk (CP42) are
automatically loaded into a device that is switched on and standing by.
H-12
Factory setting
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
A new set-up window opens under ”Factory setting”, and you can then
define whether all amplifiers or only particular ones are to be set to
ex-factory status. You may also load the factory set-ups for the display
and control panel (AB) and communications processor (CP).
Password
Save/Load
Data acquisition
2. Press
Interface
Print
Language
Time
”Factory setting” button and confirm with
Save/Load setup
save
load
.
to choose the
.
Factory setting
to select the required
channels (or even AB, CP) from control fields 1 to 16 and confirm
Copy
with
labelled
(a tick appears in the selection box). With the button
All
select all the control fields at once.
OK
Load factory setup
AB CP
to select the key
.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
All
OK
Cancel
.
and confirm the
H-13
Copy setup
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Some or all of the settings can be sent as required from one channel to
another (or to several). The ”Copy” button is used for this.
Password
2. Press
Save/Load
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
Time
4. Use
.
to select the number
of the channel from which you want to copy the setups and confirm
Save/Load setup
save
to choose the ”Copy” button and confirm with
.
load
Factory setting
with
.
Copy
to select from control
fields 1 to 16 the required channels from which you want to import
OK
settings and confirm with
(a tick appears in the selection box).
If you wish to accept settings from all channels, select the ”All”
Copy setup
Copy from channel:
1↓
.
to amplifier channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
All
Whole setup
Remote contacts
Limit switches
Peak values
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
OK
to select from the
vertical control fields the channels from which you want to import
settings, and confirm with
(a tick appears in the selection box).
Cancel
.
to select the key
and confirm the
.
H-14
System Ý Data acquisition
3
Recording measurement series
With MGCplus, to record measurement series, you can configure and
save up to 17 data acquisition programs (16 on the hard disk).
PC card harddisk
Saved data is stored in the RAM of communications processor CP42,
or on its PC card harddisk (optional). The following types of harddisks
are supported:
CP42
RS 232
CARDBUS
•
•
USB DEVICE
•
USB HOST
ETHERNET
Harddisk type ATA standard, Type 2 (narrow design, approx. 5 mm
thick)
The maximum capacity is in principle not limited. At the moment the
PC card harddisks up to 5 GB have been tested.
Formatted in FAT-16 or FAT-32 data systems. Other data systems
(e.g. NTFS) are not supported.
As the data rates of these hard disks are generally limited to 1 MB/s, a
maximum of 13 channels of the MGCplus in 4 byte format with a
maximum measurement rate of 19.2 kHz can be recorded.
YE SLAVE
RD ERROR
GN MASTER
IN
CAUTION
SYNC
CTRL I/O
OUT
24V 1 2 GND 1 2
OUT
IN
Avoid electrostatic discharge! The PCMCIA hard disk might be
damaged by static discharge. Touch a grounded object before
installation or wear an approved grounding wristband.
To set the measurement series parameters, use either display and
control panel AB22A/AB32, or the PC software HBM MGCplus
Assistant.
H-15
3.1
Setting the measurement series parameters
Select setup window
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
2. Press the function key
, use the cursor keys to select
”Data acquisition” and confirm with
.
Data acquisition
Measuring rate/interval
Required measuring rate (above 1Hz select in Hz) or measuring
interval (below 1Hz select in seconds) for all the defined channels.
DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS
50Hz ↓
Measuring rate/interval:
Values: 1000 ...
Periods:
20.00 s... ↓
Time:
Number of values to be measured per period.
10 ...
Channels/Signals:
Trigger:
define...
Length of the period in seconds, minutes or hours.
define...
20.00 % ...
Start condition:
Immediate ↓
Stop condition:
Number of values ↓
NOTE
file on HD ↓
MGCP0000.MEA ...
File name:
change ↓
DAQ comments:
4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB ↓
Format:
Reduction factor:
480
1
save
Values and Time affect each other. If you define the number of
values for a given period, the time will be calculated and vice
versa.
Periods
Number of periods. If zero is selected here, once the period is started
by an F-key, it will be repeated endlessly.
No ↓
Auto start:
Param. set:
Time
Time stamp:
Pre trigger:
Save to:
Values
read
Example:
s
min
h
50 values
1sec
1000 values
t
20sec
Period 1
20sec
Period 2
H-16
Time stamp
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
If time stamp is selected (
the files.
), two additional time columns appear in
Example:
You have selected: Channel 2: Gross; Channel 4: Net, Store1; and
Time stamp.
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
File name:
Channel2
Gross
Time
Channel4
Net
Channel4
Store1
Time
stamp 1
Carry
Time stamp
1:
2400 Hz ↓
Values: 1000 ...
Periods:
50Hz ↓
2: 2400 Hz ↓
100 Hz ↓
3:
20.00 s... ↓
Time:
1000 ...
Channels/Signals:
define...
Trigger:
define...
Time stamp:
Pre trigger:
20.00 % ...
Start condition:
Immediate ↓
Stop condition:
No ↓
OK
Param.set:
Cancel
save
0
If several ( 2) signals are chosen for a channel (e.g Gross and
Net), the maximum measuring rate is reduced to 2400 Hz!
all channels
read
Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Comb.PV
Remote
Select channels and signals (Gross, Net Store1, Store2) for the current
measurement series. With “all channels”, all channels are activated and
deactivated and the signal selection from the first column is retained.
NOTE
file on HD ↓
Save to:
Channel select
Auto start:
Channels/Signals8
2400Hz
H-17
Trigger function
50Hz ↓
Values: 1000 ...
Periods:
20.00 s... ↓
Time:
Three types of trigger are available:
10 ...
Channels/Signals:
define...
Trigger:
define...
Time stamp:
20.00 % ...
Start condition:
Immediate ↓
Stop condition:
3. Measuring rate trigger (with Start and Stop)
A Start or Stop condition (Trigger condition) can be:
file on HD ↓
MGCP0000.MEA ...
File name:
change ↓
DAQ comments:
Format:
Reduction factor:
Param. set:
No ↓
save
1
•
a measurement level
•
a limit switch
•
a measurement band
•
an external input signal
These Start/Stop conditions can be defined independently and
combinated together. The functions AND or OR are available for this
(also see page H-19):
480
Auto start:
1. Start trigger (with a maximum of four trigger conditions)
2. Stop trigger (with a maximum of four trigger conditions)
Pre trigger:
Save to:
If you want to use the Trigger function, you must first define the trigger
conditions.
read
Example
STARTTr. 1
STARTTr. 2
STARTTr. 3
STARTTr. 4
OR
STOP-T
r. 1
STOP-T
r. 2
STOP-T
r. 3
AND
STOP-T
r. 4
Define
Trigger conditions
OR combination
defines Start trigger
AND combination defines
event
Stop trigger event
Setup
Measure
Pre trigger
Time
Get DAQ
(F-key)
Start DAQ
Data acquisition
of a period
Initialise Trigger measurement
DAQ= Data acquisition program
H-18
In the example on page H-17, the Start condition could be defined as:
Start-Trigger 1
Start-Trigger 2
Start-Trigger 3
Start-Trigger 4
Stop-Trigger 1
Stop-Trigger 2
Stop-Trigger 3
Stop-Trigger 4
Start-Meas.rate-Trg.
Stop-Meas.rate-Trg.
start measurement if force higher than 5 kN
or
if pressure lower than 5 bar
or
if the temperature is higher than 22oC
Start-Trigger 1
Define trigger
Trigger:
Start-Trigger 1 ↓
Type:
Off ↓
Channel:
1↓
Mode:
higher ↓
Level:
0.000000% ...
Define trigger
This is where you define whether data acquisition starts immediately or
whether a particular trigger event starts or stops data acquisition.
Signal:
OK
Gross ↓
0.000000% ...
Cancel
Trigger
You can set up to four different Start and Stop triggers and one
”measuring rate trigger”.
Measuring rate trigger
The Start-Meas.rate-Trigger changes the measuring rate when the
trigger event occurs.
Example:
Off
Measurement level
Measurement band
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
External trigger
The Trigger event will cause a switch from long-term measurement
(e.g. measuring interval = 10000 sec) to dynamic measurement (e.g.
measuring rate = 1200 Hz).
Setting the trigger functions of the des CP22/CP42 digital inputs via the
display and control units AB22A, ABX22A or AB32 is not possible.
H-19
Mode
Start-Trigger 1
Start-Trigger 2
Start-Trigger 3
Start-Trigger 4
Stop-Trigger 1
Stop-Trigger 2
Stop-Trigger 3
Stop-Trigger 4
Stop-Meas.rate-Trg.
Off: Trigger inactive
Measurement level:
Trigger:
Start-Trigger 1 ↓
Type:
Off ↓
Channel:
1↓
Mode:
higher ↓
Level:
0.000000% ...
Trigger condition initiated by measurement
signal when over or below level value.
Example:
Signal:
lower
higher
↓
Measurement level:
Start-Trigger 1
Define trigger
OK
Configure the Start/Stop conditions.
Gross ↓
Level
0.000000% ...
Cancel
Time
Start of the data acquisition
program
Condition met
Example:
Off
Measurement level
Measurement band
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
External trigger
Measurement level: higher
Level
Time
Start of the data acquisition
program
Condition met
H-20
Measurement band:
Start-Trigger 1
Start-Trigger 2
Start-Trigger 3
Start-Trigger 4
Stop-Trigger 1
Stop-Trigger 2
Stop-Trigger 3
Stop-Trigger 4
Stop-Meas.rate-Trg.
Trigger condition initiated by
measurement signal when over or
below band limits. The band lies
between “Level 1” and “Level 2”.
Measurement band:
outside
↓
Example:
inside
Start-Trigger 1
Define trigger
Trigger:
Start-Trigger 1 ↓
Type:
Off ↓
Channel:
1↓
Mode:
higher ↓
Level:
0.000000% ...
Level 2
Signal:
OK
Gross ↓
Level 1
Time
0.000000% ...
Cancel
Start of the data
acquisition program
Condition met
Example:
Measurement band: inside
Off
Measurement level
Measurement band
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
External trigger
Level 2
Level 1
Time
Start of the data
acquisition program
Condition met
H-21
Start-Trigger 1
Start-Trigger 2
Start-Trigger 3
Start-Trigger 4
Stop-Trigger 1
Stop-Trigger 2
Stop-Trigger 3
Stop-Trigger 4
Stop-Meas.rate-Trg.
Start-Trigger 1
Define trigger
Trigger:
Start-Trigger 1 ↓
Type:
Off ↓
Channel:
1↓
Mode:
higher ↓
Level:
0.000000% ...
OK
Limit1-Limit4:
The trigger is initiated by a limit switch
(High: LED on, data acquisition program
starts; Low: LED off).
External trigger:
Trigger initiated by an external signal
(remote contact 7 on the connection
board).
Channel
Source channel for the trigger definitions.
Signal:
Gross ↓
0.000000% ...
Signal
Source signal for the trigger definitions.
Cancel
Off
Measurement level
Measurement band
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
External trigger
H-22
1↓
Mode:
higher ↓
Level:
0.000000% ...
Signal:
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
Cancel
high, low; low
External trigger
high, low; low
high; high
high; high
↓
Limit switches
↓
inside; outside; outside
lower
inside; inside
low
low
outside
Example: higher
The trigger condition is met if the measurement signal is higher than the
trigger level.
Level 1
↓ ↓
Measurement
band
higher; higher
0.000000% ...
OK
higher
lower
lower
higher
Gross ↓
higher; lower; lower
↓
Channel:
Mode
Measurement level
↓
Off ↓
Type
↓
Type:
The trigger type set will determine the different edges you can set:
↓
Trigger:
Start-Trigger 1 ↓
Use Mode to define when a trigger condition is met.
↓
Start-Trigger 1
Define trigger
Mode
↓
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
higher
lower
Off
Measurement level
Measurement band
Limit1
Limit2
Limit3
Limit4
External trigger
Level 2
Level
The level determines the difference value, for comparing with the
measurement signal.
0, 1 or 2 trigger levels are active, depending on the trigger type set.
Type
which level is significant?..
Measurement level
level 1 only
Measurement
band
level 1 and level 2
Limit switches
−
External trigger
−
H-23
Pre trigger:
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
The Pre trigger input field establishes how many values are recorded
before the trigger event (dividing measurement recording into a Pre
trigger range and a Post trigger range). The entry refers to the “Values”
input field in the setup dialogue.
Example:
Password
Values: 1200
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Pre trigger: 20 %
Interface
Print
Language
120 values are recorded in the Pre trigger range and
1200−120 = 1080 values are recorded in the Post trigger range.
Time
4
Values: 1200 ...
Periods:
Time:
4.0
define...
Trigger:
define...
Start condition:
Immediate ↓
Stop condition:
file on HD ↓
Reduction factor:
Immediate:
Ignore Start trigger. Data acquisition starts
immediately.
AND-combined:
All Start conditions must be met, to start data
acquisition.
OR-combined:
Data acquisition starts if one of the start
conditions is met.
MGCP0000.MEA ...
change ↓
DAQ comments
Format:
Time 4 sec
Start condition:
20.00 % ...
File name:
Pre trigger
in %:
Time stamp:
Pre trigger:
Save to:
s... ↓
1 ...
Channels/Signals:
3.2 sec
−0.8 sec
300Hz ↓
Post trigger
480
Auto start:
No ↓
Number
of values
Param.
set:
save
1
Trigger AND-combined
Trigger OR-combined
read
Immediate
Trigger OR-combined
NOTE
If only 1 trigger is on (e.g. Start-Trigger 1), you must select
AND/OR (although a combination is not possible).
H-24
Stop condition:
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Password
Number of values: Measurement ends, if the given number (entered
under “Values”) of values is reached.
AND-combined:
All Stop conditions must be met, to end data
acquisition.
OR-combined:
Data acquisition ends, if one of the Stop conditions
is met.
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Save to:
Interface
Print
Language
file on HD:
Time
NOTE
300Hz ↓
Values: 1200 ...
Periods:
Time:
4.0
define...
Trigger:
define...
Time stamp:
Pre trigger:
20.00 % ...
Start condition:
Immediate ↓
Stop condition:
Save to:
File name:
Several files:
Save to several files on the hard disk of the
MGCplus (max. 999). If you compress the file, only
one file will be created
Internal RAM:
Save to internal RAM of CP42
If you have chosen “Save to file on HD”, allocate the file name here.
change ↓
Reduction factor:
Auto start:
Re-starting the measurement program does not overwrite the file,
instead it increments the counter in the file name (the first four
letters are retained, the last four are incremented).
File name:
file on HD ↓
MGCP0000.MEA ...
DAQ comments
Format:
s... ↓
1 ...
Channels/Signals:
Save to one file on the hard disk of MGCplus.
Enter the name under “File name”.
480
NOTE
No ↓
Param.
set:
save
1
Number
of values
Trigger AND−combined
Trigger OR−combined
read
Immediate
Trigger AND−combined
Trigger OR−combined
Measurement files larger than 2 GB can not be operated on PCs
with the Windows) operating system. The CP42 communication
processor closes files with a file size of 2 GB and then continues
recording in a new file.
H-25
Data acquisition comment
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
You may assign any comment you like to a data acquisition. Comments
can be viewed when the “Data acquisition” type is showing in the upper
left part of the display.
Data acquisition comment: Change
You may change an existing comment, that is, you may enter new or
amended information.
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Data acquisition comment: Select
Interface
Print
Language
You can select from the comments stored on the PCMCIA hard disk
(see also page G-23, “Load data acquisition comment”).
Time
Format
Subsequent processing of the values determines the data acquisition
format. You can select three different formats:
4 Byte INT, 2 Byte INT and 4 Byte FLOAT.
50Hz ↓
Values: 1000 ...
Periods:
20.00 s... ↓
Time:
10 ...
Channels/Signals:
define...
Trigger:
define...
Time stamp:
NOTE
Pre trigger:
20.00 % ...
Start condition:
Immediate ↓
Stop condition:
file on HD ↓
Save to:
MGCP0000.MEA ...
File name:
change ↓
DAQ comments:
Format:
Reduction factor:
480
No ↓
Auto start:
Param. set:
HBM Software packages such as MGCplus Wizard or catman can
automatically detect all three formats and scale the values
accordingly. If an accuracy of 32767 parts (i.e. measuring range
divided into 32767 parts) is sufficient for your data acquisition, the
2 Byte INT format is advisable, as it only needs half as much
storage space as the two other formats.
1
save
read
H-26
Reduction factor
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
When you activate data reduction (
), an additional data set is
created on the PCMCIA hard disk during data acquisition. This data set
does not store all measured values, but only the extreme values
(Min/Max) recorded at specified intervals.
The interval is determined by the reduction factor in relation to the
measuring rate used.
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
You may input a reduction factor in the range 480 to 32767.
Interface
Print
Language
Example:
MEAS. RATE: 2400 Hz
Time
Reduction factor: 480
2400 Hz 5 Hz ^
200 ms interval
480
50Hz ↓
Values: 1000 ...
Periods:
20.00 s... ↓
Time:
10 ...
Channels/Signals:
define...
Trigger:
define...
Time stamp:
NOTE
Pre trigger:
20.00 % ...
Start condition:
Immediate ↓
Stop condition:
A reduced data set can only be created if only one signal is being
acquired per channel (Select Gross/Net/Store1/Store2, see page
H-16).
file on HD ↓
Save to:
MGCP0000.MEA ...
File name:
change ↓
DAQ comments:
Format:
Reduction factor:
480
No ↓
Auto start:
Param. set:
Extreme values will be recorded at 200 ms intervals (acquisition rate
5 Hz).
1
save
read
H-27
. . . format:
Reading a CP42 file
You must know the internal file format to be able to read and interpret the data in the file. A CP42 file is a binary file,
with the following structure:
The following header data precedes the actual data area:
File ID (4 Byte LONG) // currently = 6001
Channel values (4 Byte LONG)
Length of a data row (i.e. one value for all channels/signals) in bytes (4 Byte LONG)
Values of data rows (i.e. values/channel) in the file (4 Byte LONG)
Data format used to save the values ( 4 Byte LONG)
Measuring rate used for recording (4 Byte LONG)
Size of the header area in bytes (4 Byte LONG) // currently = 512
Reserved (4 Byte LONG)
Followed, for each channel, by:
Channel number (4 Byte LONG)
Scaling info: measuring range MR (4 Byte FLOAT)
Scaling info: Offset (zero offset) OS (4 Byte FLOAT)
Unit (4 Byte CHARACTER)
Signal mask (4 Byte LONG)
The signal mask specifies how many values appear in the data row for each channel:
Bit 0 set: GROSS signal
Bit 1 set: NET signal
Bit 2 set: Peak value 1
Bit 3 set: Peak value 2
H-28
This means that a maximum of 4 successive values may be displayed for each individual channel.
This channel block is followed by information on date and time:
TimeDate (30 Byte CHARACTER)
The subsequent bytes to the end of the header area are reserved for future use and can be omitted. They are followed, data row by data row (in the example, we assume that Bit 0 (Gross) and Bit 2 (Peak value 1) are set), by the
values:
C1, 1 (Gross)
C1: Channel 1
C1, 1 (PV1)
C2, 1 (Gross)
C2, 1 (PV 1)
________________________________
New data row
C1, 2 (Gross)
C1, 2 (PV 1)
C2, 2 (Gross)
C2, 2 (PV 1)
Each value (measurement) occupies 4 bytes (data formats 1253=LONG and 1257=FLOAT) or 2 bytes (data format
1255=INT). Integer formats are stored in INTEL (TM) format, i.e. MSB −> LSB.
The data format used for recording will determine how the source values are re-scaled for
each channel:
1253 (LONG): physical value = (binary source value) / (256*7680000) * MR + OS
1255 (INT): physical value = (binary source value) * 256 / 7680000) * MR + OS
1257 (FLOAT): physical value = (binary source value)
MR: measuring range
OS: offset
NOTE
the 1253 LONG format includes status information in the least significant byte. To call this status, you
should check this byte, before (!) you scale, as dividing by 256 will cause the least significant byte to be
lost.
H-29
The structure of the Status byte is given below:
Bit 0:
Output of LIV 1 active, if set
Bit 1:
Bit 2:
Bit 3:
Bit 4:
Gross signal overflow, if set
Bit 5:
Net signal overflow, if set
Bit 6:
Calibration error, if set
Bit 7:
Amplifier settings changed during measurement (e.g. by remote control), if set
H-30
Auto start:
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
NOTE
You can store and recall all the settings (Start/Stop conditions
etc.,) in a data acquisition parameter set. To be able to use the
parameter set, you must assign two Function keys:
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
a) Assign the function “Recall data acquisition parameters” to one
Function key.
Press the F-key to recall the parameter set.
Interface
Print
Language
Time
b) Assign the function “Start/Stop data acquisition” ( ) to
a second Function key.
Press the F-key to start the data acquisition program.
50Hz ↓
Values: 1000 ...
Periods:
20.00 s... ↓
Time:
10 ...
Channels/Signals:
define...
Trigger:
define...
Time stamp:
Pre trigger:
20.00 % ...
Start condition:
Immediate ↓
Stop condition:
file on HD ↓
Save to:
MGCP0000.MEA ...
File name:
Reduction factor:
Param. set:
480
No ↓
Auto start:
1
YES:
After the data acquisition parameter set has been recalled data
acquisition starts automatically.
A second Function key is not needed.
NO:
After the data acquisition parameter set has been recalled a
second Function key must be used to start
data acquisition ( ).
change ↓
DAQ comments:
Format:
The Auto start function defines what happens after a data
acquisition parameter set has been recalled.
save
read
Param.set:
You can enter parameter set numbers between 0 and 16 (0: parameter
set is stored in the CP42 Flash-PROM; 1 − 16: parameter set is stored
on the MGCplus hard disk). Numbers must first be assigned, for the
next highest to be displayed.
H-31
Save
Data acquisition parameters are stored in the chosen parameter set.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
You can store up to 16 measurement value data acquisition programs
on the MGCplus hard disk.
Recall
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
A data recording configuration, stored under a ParamSetNo., will be
imported into the MGCplus. You can then view this data acquisition
parameter set, or change it and re-save it, as required.
Interface
Print
Language
Time
50Hz ↓
Values: 1000 ...
Periods:
20.00 s... ↓
Time:
10 ...
Channels/Signals:
define...
Trigger:
define...
Time stamp:
Pre trigger:
20.00 % ...
Start condition:
Immediate ↓
Stop condition:
file on HD ↓
Save to:
MGCP0000.MEA ...
File name:
change ↓
DAQ comments:
Format:
Reduction factor:
Param. set:
480
No ↓
Auto start:
1
save
read
H-32
System Ý Interface
4
Interface
Use the ”Interface (Schnittstelle)” function to set up the characteristics
of the interfaces:
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
S
Baud rate
S
Format (word length, parity, stop bit)
S
Device address
Password
The CP42 communication processor provides you with RS232, USB
and Ethernet interfaces as standard.
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
Example 1:
RS232
Format: 8N2 (meaning 8 bits, no parity, 2 stop bits)
Time
Example 2:
The IP addresses and the net mask
Interface setup
3
RS232 ...
Ethernet ...
USB ...
IEC ...
AB locked during computer control
RS232 setup
Baudrate:
9600 Baud ↓
Format:
8E1 ↓
OK
Ethernet
cancel
An IP address always consists of 4 numbers. Each number must be in
the range 1 to 254. Absolute exceptions are the numbers 127.x.x.x and
192.168.x.x. The first of these always designates the local host, i.e.
your own machine. The numbers 192.168.x.x refer to special IP
addresses which are not forwarded over a router. Thus if a network is
numbered 192.168.x.x this automatically ensures that the network
cannot be accessed from outside. The net mask can be used to
determine and define which nodes form part of the in-house network.
This net mask uses a bit pattern to indicate where the network ends
and the computers in the network begin.
H-33
System Ý Interface
Examples:
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
IP:
192.168.001.001
Mask: 255.255.255.000
This refers to a network with the number 192.168.1 and computer
number 1 within that network
IP:
206.001.210.124
Mask: 255.255.000.000
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
This refers to a network with the number 206.1 and the computer with
the number 210.124
Interface
Print
Language
Time
Interface setup
RS232 ...
Ethernet ...
USB ...
IEC ...
3
Networks are divided into classes. Net mask 255.000.000.000
designated a Class A network. A total of 16,581,375 different
computers can be included in this network. In the case of 255.255.0.0
there are still 65,025. This is called a Class B network. The most usual
form of network is known as Class C. This has the net mask
255.255.255.0 and makes up some 99 % of all the commonly
encountered networks. Up to 254 computers can be connected
together.
Ethernet setup
Adress:
192.168.169.134
SubNetMask:
255.255.255.0
Routeradress:
0.0.0.0
OK
cancel
H-34
System Ý Interface
Router
If data packets are sent via node points, e.g. from the in-house network
to the Internet or a WAN/LAN, a router is needed. This distributes data
packets in different directions on the basis of their addresses.
Routers are computers that have been specially designed for this
purpose, and have their own operating system. It is their task to
analyze millions of IP packets, read their headers and then forward
them in the right direction.
IP address
Subnet mask
Router A address
Computer
Computer
Ethernet
Router A
Worldwide
Computer
Computer
Ethernet
Computer
Router B
H-35
System Ý Interface
If you use a router to access an MGCplus measuring amplifier system
from your PC, the address of its router must be specified in the MGC.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Direct Ethernet connection between a PC and MGCplus
Cross cable
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Computer
Interface
Print
Language
MGCplus
Time
This is by far the most common type of connection. It requires a
”crossed patch cable”, also known as a ”cross cable” for short.
Interface setup
RS232 ...
Ethernet ...
USB ...
IEC ...
3
When connecting an MGCplus to a PC through a hub, you need to use
a patch cable.
As delivered, the Ethernet interface for your CP42 is configured as
follows:
Ethernet setup
Adress:
192.168.169.134
SubNetMask:
255.255.255.0
Routeradress:
0.0.0.0
OK
If your computer has an IP address of, say, 172.34.24.13, your
MGCplus should have the IP address 172.34.24.x (x≠13, x≠255) if you
are using a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
cancel
IP address = 192.168.169.134
Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0
Router = 0.0.0.0
H-36
System Ý Interface
IEEE 488 − Settings
Adress:
4
card type:
NI PCMCIA − GPIB
OK
IEC
Settings for the IEC−bus connection with a
PCMCIA−GPIB−card (PCMCIA−GPIB, NI−488.2).
cancel
Display and control panel in computer operating mode
The display and control panel may be disabled whilst the computer is
operating (factory setting) or can be active. In disabled mode only
status information and measured values are updated.
H-37
System Ý Print
5
Print
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Use the ”Print” function to print out the settings for the AB22A/AB32 or
the amplifier module and measured values. You can specify the
required channels and signals for printing out the measured values
under ”Selection”.
1. Use the shift key to switch to
the settings mode.
Password
2. Print
Save/load
Recording
3. In the Pull-Up-menu select ”Print” and confirm with
Interface
Print
Language
You will then be in the ”Print” settings window.
4. In the selection field, select ”Print via:” the required interface and
Time
confirm with
.
.
A new settings window is opened under ”Format...”, where the print
format can be set.
PRINT
Print settings via:
USB ↓
AB
Amplifier
Format...
.
A new settings window is opened under ”Selection...”.
Selection...
6. Use
OK
Gross
Net
SPW 1
SPW 2
SPW 12
GW Status
to select the device with which the settings should be
printed out (AB or amplifier) and confirm with
Settings for signals to be printed
SIGNAL PRINTING SELECTION
5. Use
Channel 3
OK
to select the buttons whose settings are to be printed out.
Confirm with
7. Use
(nappears in the selection field).
to select the button ”OK” and confirm with
.
Abort
All signals
H-38
System Ý Language
6
Language
Use this function to select the language for the display, the menus and
the Help texts.
System
Display
Amplifier
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
Time
LANGUAGE
Language: English↓
English
Deutsch
Francais
Options
H-39
System Ý Time
7
Time
Use this function to set the date, the day and the time.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Password
Save/Recall
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
Time
DATE/TIME SET-UP
Date:
Day ...
Day:
Friday ↓
Time
Hour ...
Month ↓
Min ...
Year ...
Sec ...
H-40
System Ý Time
I-1
I
Menu structure
I-2
I-3
Menu structure
The menu structure shown below is intended to help you find the set-up menus you are looking for more quickly. At
the same time the necessary sequence of keys is specified for you.
Structural components
F-key assignment in measuring mode (output status)
This key takes you to the first selection menu
Selection bar
or
A
The lines in the
pull-up menu are
displayed in tiled format.
If a menu does not fit on a
page, it is divided. The
letters in circles guide you
to the next page.
Set-up window
↓
Selection field
I-4
Menu structure
Symbols
mV/V ↓
Selection field
0.000000...
Edit field
measure
measure...
Button (starts action)
Button (opens new set-up window)
Activation fields
Cursor keys
Arrows show the direction in which the keys work
I-5
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
A
Password
Password
new...
User:
Password:
delete...
change...
set...
Access:
Off ↓
Password protection
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Password
Save/Load
Data acquisition
Interface
Print
Language
Time
Display format
F-keys
Channel names
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
Switch
Remote contacts
Limit switches
Combine LIV
Peak value stores
Version
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
OK
Add user
Change password
User:
New password:
OK
Delete user
Password:
Cancel
Access:
OK
Operator
Cancel
User1:
Miller
delete
User2:
Morgan
delete
delete
User3:
Operator
System
OK
Cancel
Cancel
I-6
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or
A
B
Save/Load
Save/Load setup
Save...
Load...
Factory setup...
Copy
OK
Load parameter
Channel
Param.set
CP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
1 1 1
1
OK
Cancel
Copy setup
Load factory setup
Copy from channel:
1↓
AB CP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
to amplifier channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
All
Whole setup
Remote contacts
Limit switches
Peak values
Transducer
Conditioning
Display
Analogue outputs
OK
Save parameter
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
Channel
Param.set
1 1 1
CP
1
OK
Cancel
Cancel
All
OK
Cancel
I-7
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or
B
C
Data acquisition
Data acquisition parameters
1: 2400 Hz ↓
2: 2400 Hz ↓
3: 100 Hz ↓
20.00 s... ↓
Values: 1000 ...
Time:
Periods:
10 ...
Channels/Signals:
define...
Trigger:
Time stamp:
define...
s
min
h
1Hz
150Hz 10000s
2Hz
160Hz
5000s
3Hz
200Hz
2000s
4Hz
240Hz
1000s
5Hz
300Hz
500s
6Hz
400Hz
200s
8Hz
480Hz
100s
Pre trigger:
Start condition:
20.00 % ...
Immediate ↓
10Hz
600Hz
50s
15Hz
1200Hz
20s
Stop condition:
20Hz
2400Hz
10s
file on HD ↓
25Hz
4800Hz
5s
30Hz
9600Hz
2s
Save to:
MGCP0000.MEA ...
File name:
change ↓
Acq. comment:
48Hz
50Hz
Format:
Reduction factor:
1
save
60Hz
75Hz
No ↓
Auto start:
Param. set:
480
80Hz
load
100Hz
120Hz
Channel select
OK
Cancel
all channels
Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Comb.PV
2400Hz
4 Byte Integer MSB .. LSB
4 Byte Integer LSB..MSB
2 Byte Integer MSB..LSB
2 Byte Integer LSB..MSB
4 Byte Float MSB..LSB
4 Byte Float LSB..MSB
Immediate
Trigger OR-combined
Number of values
Trigger OR-combined
Remote
I-8
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or
C
D
Data acquisition
Data acquisition parameters
1: 2400 Hz ↓
2: 2400 Hz ↓
20.00 s... ↓
Values: 1000 ...
Time:
Periods:
10 ...
Channels/Signals:
define...
Trigger:
3: 100 Hz ↓
Time stamp:
define...
Pre trigger:
Start condition:
20.00 % ...
Immediate ↓
Stop condition:
file on HD ↓
Save to:
change ↓
Acq. comment:
Format:
Reduction factor:
480
No ↓
Auto start:
Param. set:
Define trigger
Trigger:
save
1
No
Yes
load
Start-Trigger 1
Start-Trigger 1 ↓
Off ↓
1↓
Signal:
Gross ↓
higher ↓
↓ ↓
higher
lower
lower
higher
file on HD
internal RAM
MGCP0000.MEA ...
File name:
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
higher
lower
s
min
h
0.000000% ...
OK
0.000000% ...
Cancel
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Off
Measurement level
Measurement band
LIV1
LIV2
LIV3
LIV4
External trigger
Start-Trigger 1
Start-Trigger 2
Start-Trigger 3
Start-Trigger 4
Stop-Trigger 1
Stop-Trigger 2
Stop-Trigger 3
Stop-Trigger 4
Stop-Meas.rate-Trg.
I-9
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or
D
E
Interface
Interface setup
RS232...
Ethernet...
USB...
3
OK
Ethernet-setup
OK
USB-setup
Address:
CP42p 00002
OK
Cancel
Address:
172.20.14.182
SubNetMask:
255.255.0.0
Router address:
0.0.0.0
OK
Cancel
RS232-setup
Baud rate:
9600 Baud ↓
Format:
8E1 ↓
OK
Cancel
8N1
801
8E1
8N2
802
8E2
300 Baud
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
19200 Baud
38400 Baud
57600 Baud
I-10
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
E
Print
RS232 ↓
Print setup through :
or
AB
Language
Date/Time setup
Language: English ↓
Date:
Amplifier
Setup of the signals to be printed
Select...
English
Deutsch
Francaise
OK
Select signals for printout
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
LIV-Status
Channel 3
OK
Cancel
All signals
Time
Language
Print
RS232
RS485
Printer
Day ...
Day:
Friday ↓
Time
Hour ...
Month ↓
Min ...
Year ...
Sec ...
I-11
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or
Display format
Display Format
one value
0 ...
one value ↓
Screen No:
Type:
Off ↓
Status line
define...
Off
On
all
Selection
OK
Channel
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
LIV1
LIV2
LIV3
LIV4
Cancel
All channels
Channel names
F-keys
All signals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
0...9
free
one value
3 values
6 values
YT-Diagram
XY-Diagram
Status limit switch
Data acquisition
F-keys setup
Level
Level 1
1 ...
F1: Tare ↓
F2: Zero/Cal/Measure↓ One channel
F3: Autocal ↓
One channel
One channel ↓
F4: ...F-level
not assigned
Tare
Zeroing
Clear stores
Zero/Cal/Measure
Autocal
LED Status/Level
LIV level
Remote/Local
Shunt On/Off
Start/Stop display
Print display
Print values
Print setup
Load from XM001
Load next P-set
Load previous P-set
Switch display unit
Load DAQ param. set
Load DAQ comments
Linearisation on/off
Ident
Channel Name
Channel 1
Channel name:
2−ML55B
1
2
3
One channel
All channels
I-12
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or
Transducer
Conditioning
Transducer
Type
SG full bridge
Excitation
5V↓
kg ↓
Unit:
mV/V
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
Zero pt.:
50.0000
...
2.0000 ...
Nom. val.:
measure...
K-Factor:
Conditioning
Channel1
Zero reference:
Zero offset:
Tare:
Disable zeroing:
Low pass 100 ↓
High pass Off ↓
measure
Adjust amplifier
3
Display
Channel1
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
V
−>0<−
V
V −>T<−
Disable taring: 3
Bessel ↓V
0.0000 ...
3
Hz
Display
Channel1
V↓
Unit
3 Abs
Display range
from −10.000 V
10.000 V
to
Step
100 ↓
mV/V
V
%
0.0000 ...
Bessel
Butterworth
OK
1V
2.5V
5V
1st pt.:
2nd pt.:
kg
0.0000
0.0000
OK
mV/V Shunt off
0.0000 Measure
0.0000 Measure
Cancel
V
g
kg
t
kt
tons
lbs
N
kN
bar
mbar
Pa
pas
.
.
Off
On
100
40
20
10
5
2.5
1.25
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
F
1
2
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000
I-13
Menu structure
Measure
Display
System
F
Amplifier
Options
or
Analogue outputs
Analogue outputs
Switch
Channel1
Switch
Output Vo2: Net ↓
V
0.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
Point 1:
100.0000 ...
0.0000 ...
Point 2:
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Comb. PV
Channel 1
−>T<−
Off
5 Min
once
−>0<−
Autocal
Off ↓
Param.set
1−intern. ↓
Ampl. Input
Zero ↓
Zero
Cal
Measure
Remote
LED display
1−intern.
2−intern.
3−intern.
4−intern.
5−intern.
6−intern.
7−intern.
8−intern.
Status
Level
Off ↓
Status ↓
Off
On
I-14
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or
Remote contacts
Remote contacts
Remote
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Limit switches
G
Combine LIV
Channel 1
On ↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
↓
no function
ACAL−autocal
TARA−tare
CPV1−clear store1
HLD1−hold store 1
CPV2−clear store2
HLD2−hold store 2
ZERO−zero balance
SHNT−Shunt ON/OFF
PRNT−select for printing
CAL−input to cal. signal
NULL−input to zero signal
INV−change sign
REMT−Remote ON/OFF
INT−Start/Stop Integration
Off
On
Limit switch 1
Limit switches
Name
1-LIV1 ...
Enable
Input signal
No ↓
Level
Hysteresis
100.000 ...
%
1.000 ...
%
Direction
Output logic
Over limit ↓
Delay
LIV output:
Comb.:
Input 1:
Input 2:
Input 3:
Input 4:
Gross ↓
Channel1
−−− ↓
AND ↓
LIV 1 ↓
LIV 2 ↓
LIV 3 ↓
LIV 4 ↓
Positive logic ↓
define...
Input
Message when ON
Message when OFF
−−−−
LIV 4
LIV 4 inverted
Remote contact 4
Remote contact 4 inverted
free ↓
1-LIV1 ON...
1-LIV1 OFF...
Normal ↓
Normal ↓
free
disabled
Positive logic
Negative logic
Over limit
Below limit
No
Yes
Gross
Net
Store1
Store2
Store12
LIV-Delay
12 3 4
LIV-On
Delay time
LIV-Off
0ms
OK
OK
Combine LIV
Channel 1
1 ....
Cancel
OK
Normal
Inverse
AND
OR
EXOR
NAND
NOR
NEXOR
−−−
1
2
3
4
I-15
Menu structure
Measure
System
G
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or
Peak value stores
Store 1 Function
Store 2 Function
Comb. PVS 1-2
Channel 1
Version
Version
KANAL 1
Maximum gross ↓
Off ↓
0.000... s
Maximum gross
Off ↓
0.000... s
−−−
Identification:
Comments:
HBM, RD002−ML50B, P4.0A
...
Serial and revisionnumber
Off
On
−−−
Mean PVS1,PVS2
Integrate gross
Integrate net
Maximum gross
Maximum net
Minimum gross
Minimum net
I-16
Menu structure
J-1
J
Specifications
J-2
Specifications ➝ Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules
J-3
1
Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules
1.1
General data
Width
Maximum sampling rate without linearisation
mm
Measured
values/s
20.3 (4 divs)1)
19200
Limit switches
Number
Reference level
Reference value (freely adjustable)
Hysteresis factory setting
Adjustment accuracy
%
%
%
Response time
ms
4
Gross, net, peak values
−100 to +100 of the range
1 of the range
0.0033 of the range
1.0
with Butterworth filter > 5Hz
and Bessel filter > 1.25 Hz
Peak value stores
2
Maximum; Minimum
Peak-to-peak; Mean
Number
Function
Tie
Update rate
µs
Clearing the peak value stores (switching to current
measured value)
inside 1ms, through remote contacts
Recording of the current value/peak value
Time constant for envelope function
30
with Butterworth filter > 250Hz
and Bessel filter > 100 Hz
inside 1ms, through remote contacts
s
0.01 ... 10000
V
V
V
V
kΩ
−0.5 to +5.5
min. +4.0
max. +0.7
> 1.1
100
V
V
kΩ
> 4.0
< 0.7
1
Remotes (HCMOS)
Inputs (8 lines, connectable as desired)
Permissible input voltage
HIGH level
LOW level
Schmitt trigger, hysteresis
Pull up resistances (internal)
Outputs (Limit switches, Error)
HIGH level with max. 1mA
LOW level with max. 0.7mA
Internal resistance
1)
For the ML38B: 40.6mm (8divs)
J-4
Nominal (rated) temperature range
Service temperature range
Storage temperature range
°C [°F]
°C [°F]
°C [°F]
Operating voltages
V
Card format (Euro)
Weight
mm
g
Connection plug
14.6...17.0; (< 120mA)
7.7...8.3; (< 120mA)2)
+4.9...5.1; (< 150mA)
100 x 160
300
IEC 603-2 indirectly
Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2
V
kΩ
Ω
10V (asymmetrical)
>5
<5
Amplifier output with zero balance
Output staggered by the tare value
Peak value store 1 output (maximum or minimum)
Peak value store 2 output (maximum or minimum)
Peak value store 3 output (peak combine of 1 and 2)
Monitor output for Vo1 via BNC plug on front panel
Nominal (rated) voltage
Permissible load resistance
Internal resistance
V
kΩ
kΩ
10 (asymmetrical)
> 1000
1
Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature
(effect additional to digital value)
on the outputs Vo1 and Vo2:
sensitivity
zero point
%
mV
< 0.08, typ. 0.04
< 3 typ. 2
Internal resistance
The two output voltages can be used to display the five
signal voltages.
2)
−20 ...+60 [−4 ... +140]
−20 ...+60 [−4 ... +140]
−25 ...+70 [−13 ... +158]
also connectable to 16V
1.2
J-5
Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML01B
Accuracy class
0.03
DC amplifier
Input for voltage measurement
Input signal range (selectable)
Measuring range (digitally adjustable)
Zero offset
Measurement frequency range
Internal resistance of the signal voltage source
Input for thermocouple measurement
Linearisation error (with AP09 connection board)
Linearisation range
NiCr-Ni (K)
Fe-CuNi (J)
Cu-CuNi (T)
NiCr-CuNi (E)
NiCrSi-NiSi (N)
Pt10Rh-Pt (S)
Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh (B)
Pt13Rh−Pt(R)
Max. internal resistance
Temperature range for cold junction 2)
Max. permissible common-mode voltage
symmetrical
V
V
V
Hz
1)
2)
−0.0765 ...+0.0765
0.002 ... 0.0765
0.075
0 ... 250 −1dB
1.3
kΩ
oC, [°F]
oC
oC
oC
oC
oC
oC
oC
oC
oC
oC
< 0.06
10 ... 3275, [50 ... 5927]
< 0.25 (K, J, T, E, N)
< 0.6 (S, B, R)
−158 ... +1414
−167 ... +1192
−210 ... +393
−161 ... +1005
−186 ... +1300
+181 ... +1755
+570 ... +1814
+178 ... +1769
−191 ... +1414
−190 ... +1192
−237 ... +393
−205 ... +1005
−219 ... +1300
−50 ... +1755
+160 ... +1814
−50 ... +1769
kΩ
1.3
°C, [°F]
−20 ...+ 60, [−4 ...+140]
V
Input for current measurement
Input signal range
Max. measuring frequency range
Zero offset, adjustable (”living” zero point)
−10.2 ...+10.2
0.4 ... 10.2
10
0 ... 2400 -1dB 1)
62
asymmetrical (to an internal 50Ω standard resistor)
mA
mA
Hz
mA
−50 ...+50
4 ... 50
0 ... 2400 -1dB
0 ...50
With VI > 2.5 Vpp, note limited measuring frequencies
Cold junction included in AP09 connection board
J-6
Measuring frequency range
Butterworth low pass
Nom. val. fc
(Hz)
2400 3)
2000 3)
1000 4)
500
250
80
40
20
10
5
−1dB
(Hz)
2400
2050
1050
500
246
79
37.5
19
8.9
4.5
−3dB
(Hz)
3250
2350
1190
588
291
99
49.5
25.5
12.4
6.2
Phase del.
(ms)
0.28
0.40
0.66
0.90
1.45
3.65
6.0
11
20
42
Rise time
(ms)
0.105
0.170
0.336
0.64
1.3
3.8
7.0
13.3
26
50
Overshoot %
5.2
12
12
11
10
9
7
6
5
4
Bessel low pass
Nom. val. fc
(Hz)
11004)
400
200
100*
40
20
10
5
2.5
1.25
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
−1dB
(Hz)
1100
445
235
117
38.5
22.0
10.5
5.1
2.6
1.35
0.7
0.17
0.08
0.043
−3dB
(Hz)
1780
805
410
210
68
37.5
19.0
9.6
4.8
2.4
1.2
0.3
0.15
0.075
Phase del.
(ms)
0.45
0.7
1.1
1.8
4.3
7.4
12
22
50
100
200
650
1400
3000
Rise time
(ms)
0.23
0.45
0.86
1.7
5.1
9.4
19.0
35.5
70
135
280
1100
2200
4600
Overshoot %
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
High-pass5)
from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu
from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu
Hz
Hz
Hz
0.1
1.0
10
Absolute calibration deviation
%
0.16)
Linearity deviation
%
< 0.02 typ. 0.01 % of full scale 7)
Hz
1.25
100
3
40
75
120
Noise rel. to input with filter setting
MR: 75mV
MR: 10V
Thermocouples
Type K, J, T, E, N
Type S, B, R
µVPP
µVPP
K
K
*) Factory setting
3) Valid for Vipp < 2.5V with Range = 10V (corresp. to 25% modulation of range)
4) Valid for V pp < 5V with Range = 10V (corresp. to 50% modulation of range)
I
5) In the case of resistance thermometers and thermocouples: no function
6) 0.2 % during current measurement
7) For measuring ranges > 3V or > 25mV or > 10mA; otherwise < 0.1% of full scale
typ. 0.1
typ. 1
J-7
Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off)
Meas. range 75 mV
Meas. range 10V
Thermocouples (Autocalibration on / off)
Type J, T
Type E, K, N
Type S, B, R
Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the
digital signals S1 and S2
with autocalibration on / off
Sensitivity
Zero point
10V range
75mV range
20mA range
Thermocouples
Type J, T
Type E, K, N
Type S, B, R
µV
mV
5 / 10
0.5 / 1
K
K
K
0.25 / 0.5
0.5 / 1
1/2
%
< 0.02 typ. 0.01 / < 0.2 typ.0.1
mV
µV
µA
< 0.2 / < 6
< 5 / < 50
< 4 / < 120
K
K
K
0.25 / 2.5
0.5 / 5
1 / 10
Residual carrier voltage (38.4 kHz)
Long-term drift (over 48h)
mVPP
mV
< 12
<3
J-8
1.3
Accuracy class
Excitation voltage ( 5%)
Transducer
SG full and half bridge, potentiometer, piezoresistive
transducer
0.03
V
10
Ω
220...5000
2.5
1
110...5000
60...5000
30...5000
SG quarter bridge
In conjunction with AP14 connection board
Piezoelectric transducer
Current-fed piezoelectric transducers (e.g. DeltatronR from
Brüel&Kjaer)
In conjunction with AP18i connection board
Perm. cable length between transducer and amplifier
DC amplifier
Measuring ranges
Strain gages (Low)
potentiometer, piezoresistive transducer (High)
max. 5001)
m
mV/V
mV/V
0.10...3.06
10...306
Bridge balance range
Strain gages (Low)
potentiometer, piezoresistive transducer (High)
Charge amplifier
mV/V
mV/V
3.06
306
0.40...12.2
4
40...1224
6.12
612
1.0...30.6
100...3060
Factory setting
100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS module
For a max. of 25% modulation (UAPPmax=5V)
12.24
1224
30.6
3060
2.5V
V
0.20...6.12
20...612
Voltage input with max. 2.5V amplitude
Charge amplifier
*)
1)
2)
5 *)
(Hz)
10000
3000
2000
1000
500
250
80
40
20
10
5
(Hz)
8900
2920
2160
1010
500
246
79
37.5
19
8.9
4.5
(Hz)
9900
3480
2500
1165
588
291
99
49.9
25.5
12.4
6.2
(ms)
0.13
0.16
0.24
0.66
0.9
1.45
3.65
6
11
20
42
(ms)
0.05
0.116
0.15
0.35
0.64
1.3
3.8
7
13.3
26
50
%
19 1)
13
12
12
11
10
9
7
6
5
4
J-9
Bessel low pass
Nom.val. fc −1dB
(Hz)
100000
100000
50000
Analog output only
(Digital Interface 5000 Hz Butterworth)
1000
400
200
100*)
40
20
10
5
2.5
1.25
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
High-pass
(Hz)
111000 188000 0.0027
104000 145000 0.0027
49000 84000 0.0044
900
400
230
117
38.5
22
10.5
5.1
2.6
1.35
0.7
0.17
0.08
0.043
1800
800
405
210
68
37.5
19
9.6
4.8
2.4
1.2
0.3
0.15
0.075
0.27
0.47
0.82
1.58
4.21
7.2
13.9
25
50
100
200
650
1400
3000
Overshoot
%
0.0025
0.0025
0.004
10.8
10.8
6.6
0.2
0.44
0.96
1.8
5.4
9.3
19
37
75
155
300
1200
2300
4600
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Hz
Hz
Hz
0.1
1.0
10
Max. permissible common-mode voltage
V
6
dB
dB
%
µV/V
>120 (DC)
> 95 (DC)
< 0.03 typ. 0.02 full scale
< 0.1/0.2
Strain gage
Potentiometer
(0.2...6.12mV/V)
(20...612mV/V)
Common-mode-rejection
Strain gages
Potentiometers
Linearity deviation
Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on/off)
Interference voltages at the output
Noise related to the input
with Bessel low pass
*)
3)
−3dB Phase Rise time
del.
(Hz)
(ms)
(ms)
1000 00Hz
50 000Hz
10 000Hz
1000Hz
100Hz
µV/Vpp
4
3 3)
3
1.3
0.35
(High)
(Low)
300
300
300
100
35
Factory setting
For half bridge 20µV/V. We recommend that you measure only up to a cut-off frequency of 10kHz.
J-10
Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature
on digital signals S1 and S2
SG (Low):
Sensitivity
Zero point
Potentiometer (High):
Sensitivity
Zero point
Long-term drift (over 48 h)
SG (Low):
Potentiometer (High):
µV/V
When autocalibration
on:
<0.03
<0.6
<0.03
<30
When autocalibration
off:
<0.2
<10
<0.2
<500
µV/V
µV/V
<0.25
<20
<5
<400
%
µV/V
%
Residual carrier voltage
mVPP
<5
Max. deviation of the analogue outputs from the digital
value
mV
<10
mV
<3
1.4
J-11
Accuracy class
0.03
600.15 0.06 (synchronised)
600.00 0.04 (unsynchronised)
Carrier frequency
Hz
Excitation voltage ( 5%)
V
Transducer
SG full bridge
Ω
110...5000 (VB= 5V)
60...5000 (VB= 2.5V)
30...5000 (VB= 1V)
m
500 max.
Measuring ranges
mV/V
0.1000 ... 3.0600 (VB = 5V)
0.2000 ... 6.1200 (VB = 2.5V)
0.5000 ... 15.3000 (VB = 1V)
mV/V
3.06 (VB = 5V)
6.12 (VB = 2.5V)
15.3 (VB = 1V)
5*)
SG quarter bridge
Permis. cable length between transducer and amplifier
2.5
1
Carrier frequency amplifier
Nom. val. fc −1dB
(Hz) (Hz)
200
80
40
20
10
5
Bessel low pass
Nom. val. fc −1dB
(Hz)
(Hz)
100*
40
20
10
5
2.5
1.25
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
High-pass
*)
235
88
43
22
10.6
5.3
Hz
Hz
Hz
99
40
20
9.8
4.4
2.35
1.2
0.6
0.17
0.087
0.042
−3dB
(Hz)
Phase del. Rise time Over(ms)
(ms)
shoot %
277
103
51
26
12.7
6.3
2.5
4.6
8.2
14
27
52
−3dB
(Hz)
Phase del. Rise time Over(ms)
(ms)
shoot %
180
72
35.5
18
8.6
4.4
2.15
1.15
0.31
0.155
0.08
2.7
5.2
9.8
18
35
65
125
220
640
1400
3000
1.4
3.8
7.4
14
30
56
2
4.8
10
20
40
80
160
300
1100
2200
4600
10
9
7
6
5
4
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.1
1.0
10
Factory settings
J-12
Max. permissible common−mode voltage
V
6V
Common−mode rejection
dB
> 50 (0 ... 600Hz)
Max. differential voltage DC
V
0.1
µV/VPP
< 0.3 1)
Residual carrier voltage (600Hz)
Noise voltage
Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on digital
signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net):
with autocalibration on
Sensitivity
Zero point
with autocalibration off:
Sensitivity
Zero point
Linearity deviation
µV/VPP
< 0.3 (0...200Hz)
< 0.03 (0...1.25Hz)
%
µV/V
< 0.01 typically 0.005%
< 0.1
%
µV/V
< 0.2
<2
%
< 0.02, typically 0.01 of full scale 2)
µV/V
<0.1/2
mVPP
mV
<3
<3
Long−term drift (over 48 h)
1)
2)
Measured with UB = 5V and input signal 2mV/V
For ranges > 1mV/V (UB = 5V); otherwise <0.2%
1.5
J-13
Accuracy class
0.03
Carrier frequency
Hz
75
Transducer
Resistors
Resistance thermometers
Ω
0...5000
Pt10, Pt100, Pt1000
m
2001) to 5000 Ω, PT1000
5001) to 500 Ω, PT10, PT100
Ω
20 ... 500; 200 ... 5000
Permissible cable length between transducer and
amplifier
Measuring ranges
Supply current
mAeff
1; 0.1
Nom.val. fc −1dB
(Hz)
15
10
5
Bessel low pass
Linearity variation
0...500 Ω
0...5000 Ω
Pt10
Pt100
Pt1000
1)
2)
Rise time
−3dB Phase
del.
(Hz) (Hz)
(ms)
15
27
18
9.8
18
24
4.4
8.6
35
2.35
4.4
65
1.2
2.15
125
0.6
1.15
220
0.17
0.31
640
0.087 0.155
1400
0.042
0.08
2700
Rise time
(Hz)
16
8.6
5.3
Nom.val. fc −1dB
(Hz)
15
10
5
2.5
1.25
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
High-pass2)
−3dB Phase
del.
(Hz)
(ms)
23
22
12.2
30
6.3
52
Hz
Hz
Hz
0.1
1.0
10
Ω
Ω
K
K
K
0.1
1
2.5
0.25
0.25
(ms)
16
30
56
(ms)
15
20
40
80
160
300
1100
2200
3700
Overshoot
%
7
5
4
Overshoot
%
1.2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
No function available with resistance thermometers and thermocouples
J-14
digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net):
with autocalibration on:
sensitivity
zero point
sensitivity
zero point
Long-term drift (over 48 h) (Autocalibration on)
%
mΩ
mΩ
< 0.015 typ. 0.0075 %
< 10 (Measuring range 500 Ω)
%
Ω
Ω
< 0.2
< 0.5 (Measuring range 500 Ω)
mΩ
mVpp
mV
<3
<3
1.6
J-15
0.00251)
Accuracy class
Accuracy
%
%
Carrier frequency
Hz
Excitation voltage (5%)
V
Transducer
SG full bridge
Ω
amplifier
m
(0.0025 of measured value + 0.0025 of full−scale value)
225.05 0.02
5*)
2.5
30...4000; typ.350
500 max.
Measuring ranges
mV/V
0.2 ... 5.1 (VB = 5V)
0.4 ... 10.2 (VB = 2.5V)
mV/V
5.1 (VB = 5V)
10.2 (VB = 2.5V)
Filter levels
Nominal (rated) value
Hz
f1
1.0
f2
1.5
f3
2.5
f4
3
f5
5
f6
6
f7
9
f8
10
f (−3dB)
Hz
1.1
1.6
2.3
3.2
4.6
6.3
8.3
10
f (attenuation=1000)
Hz
18.9
21.6
24.5
27.4
30.5
33.8
37.3
41
f (attenuation=1 000 000)
Hz
50
54
57
61
65
68
70
72
Settling time to 99%
s
1
0.7
0.5
0.37
0.26
0.2
0.16
0.13
Settling time to 99.999%
s
2.3
1.6
1.14
0.82
0.58
0.42
0.30
0.23
Nominal (rated) value
Hz
f1
0.03
f2
0.05
f3
0.1
f4
0.2
f5
0.5
f6
0.9
f7
1.5
f (−3dB)
Hz
0.03
0.05
0.1
0.22
0.45
0.9
1.7
Hz
0.125
0.25
0.5
1
2
4
8
Bessel low pass
Hz
0.2
0.4
0.8
1.7
3.5
7
14
Settling time to 99%
s
32
16
8
4
2
1
0.5
Settling time to 99.999%
s
48
24
12
6
3
1.5
0.75
digit
1 000 000
dB
> 100
Input resistance
MΩ
1000
Display resolution
*)
1)
Filter levels
Factory setting
In the event of irradiation, in accordance with EN 61326, table 1
J-16
Sensitivity
Zero point (related to full scale value)
%
%
< 0.002 of measured value
< 0.001 of full−scale value
Linearity variation
%
< 0.002
ppm
max. 20, typ. 8
Short−term drift over 5 min, from 2 h after switch−on
ppm
Measuring rate
1/s
max. 10, typ. 3
1.18 / 2.34 / 4.69 / 9.38 / 18.75 / 37.5 / 75
mVPP
mV
<3
<3
1.7
J-17
Accuracy class
0.03
4800.0 0.32 (not synchronised)
Carrier frequency
Hz
V
Transducer
Inductive half and full bridge
mH
2.5 ... 30 (VB= 2.5V)
1 ... 30 (VB= 1V)1)
m
500 max.
Measuring ranges
mV/V
6.00 ... 183.60 (VB = 2.5V)
15.00 ... 459.00 (VB = 1V)
mV/V
183.6 (VB = 2.5V)
459 (VB = 1V)
2.5*)
1
Nom.val. fc −1dB
(Hz)
1500
1000
500
250
80
40
20
10*)
5
Bessel low pass
Nom.val. fc −1dB
(Hz)
900
400
200
100*)
40
20
10
5
2.5
1.25
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
*)
1)
−3dB Phase
del.
(Hz) (Hz) (ms)
1600 2180
0.32
1010 1165
0.66
500
588
0.9
246
291
1.45
79
99
3.65
37.5
49.5
6
19
25.5
11
8.9
12.4
20
4.5
6.2
42
(Hz)
900
445
235
117
38.5
22
10.5
5.1
2.6
1.35
0.7
0.17
0.08
0.043
−3dB Phase
del.
(Hz)
(ms)
1550
0.47
805
0.7
410
1.1
210
1.8
68
4.3
37.5
7.4
19
12
9.6
22
4.8
50
2.4
100
1.2
200
0.3
650
0.15
1400
0.075
3000
Rise time
(ms)
0.17
0.35
0.64
1.3
3.8
7
13.3
26
50
Rise time
(ms)
0.25
0.45
0.86
1.7
5.1
9.4
19
35.5
70
135
280
1100
2200
4600
Overshoot.
%
7
12
11
10
9
7
6
5
4
Overshoot.
%
4.1
1.3
1.3
1.3
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Factory setting
with Zener barriers only VB = 1V
J-18
High-pass
Hz
Hz
Hz
0.1
1.0
10
V
6V
dB
> 50 (0 ... 4800Hz)
V
1
Linearity variation
%
< 0.02, typ. 0.01 of full scale 2)
Residual carrier voltage (4800Hz)
Noise voltage
with autocalibration on:
sensitivity
zero point
sensitivity
zero point
µV/VPP
µV/VPP
< 0.33)
< 100 (0...1500Hz)
< 50 (0...100Hz)
< 5 (0...1.25 Hz)
µV/V
< 20 / 60
%
µV/V
< 0.03 typ.0.002%
< 20
%
µV/V
< 0.2
< 120
mVPP
mV
<5
<3
Residual carrier voltage (38.4kHz)
2)
3)
for measuring ranges > 60mV/V (VB = 2.5V); otherwise < 0.2%
measured with VB = 2.5V and input signal 80mV/V
1.8
J-19
Accuracy class
0.03
Carrier frequency
Hz
V
5*)
Transducers
Strain-gage half and full bridge
Ω
mH
S.G. quarter bridge
2.5
1
110 ... 5000 (VB=5V)
60 ... 5000 (VB= 2.5V)
30 ...5000 (VB= 1V)
2.5 ... 30 (VB= 2.5V)
1 ... 30 (VB= 1V)
m
5001) max.
Measuring ranges
Strain gage
mV/V
Inductive
Strain gage
mV/V
Inductive
*)
1)
0.1000 ... 3.0600
0.2000 ... 6.1200
0.5000 ... 15.3000
(VB = 5V)
(VB = 2.5V)
(VB = 1V)
1.5000 ... 45.9000
3.0000 ... 91.8000
7.500 ... 229.500
(VB = 5V)
(VB = 2.5V)
(VB = 1V)
3.0600
6.1200
15.3000
(VB = 5V)
(VB = 2.5V)
(VB = 1V)
45.900
91.8000
229.500
(VB = 5V)
(VB = 2.5V)
(VB = 1V)
Factory setting
J-20
Measuring frequency
Butterworth/Bessel low pass
High-pass
see technical data ML50B
Hz
Hz
Hz
0.1
1.0
10
V
6V
dB
> 50 (0 ... 4800Hz)
V
1
Linearity deviation
%
< 0.02 typ. 0.01 2)
Noise
Long−term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off)
signals S1 and S2
Sensitivity
Zero point
with autocalibration off
Sensitivity
Zero point
µV/VPP
µV/V
Strain gage
< 2 (0...1500Hz)
< 1 (0... 100Hz)
< 0.2 (0...1.25 Hz)
Inductive
< 100 (0...1500Hz)
< 50 (0..100Hz)
< 5 (0...1.25Hz)
< 0.2 / 4
< 20 / 60
Strain gage
Inductive
< 0.02
%
µV/V
0.2
%
µV/V
4
<4
< 0.2
60
Long−term drift (over 48h)
2)
mVPP
mV
for measuring ranges > 1mV/V strain gage (VB = 5V) or > 30mV/V inductive; otherwise < 0,2%
<5
<3
1.9
J-21
Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML55BS6
Accuracy class
0.03
Carrier frequency
Hz
V
5*)
Transducer
Strain gage half and full bridge
Ω
2.5
1
110 ... 5000 (VB=5V)
60 ... 5000 (VB= 2.5V)
30 ...5000 (VB= 1V)
2.5 ... 20 (VB= 2.5V)
6 ... 19 (VB= 1V)
mH
Absolute calibration accuracy
%
better than 0.5
Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier
m
5001) max.
Measuring ranges
Strain gage
mV/V
Inductive
Strain gage
mV/V
Inductive
*)
1)
0.1000 ... 3.0600
0.2000 ... 6.1200
0.5000 ... 15.3000
(VB = 5V)
(VB = 2.5V)
(VB = 1V)
1.5000 ... 45.9000
3.0000 ... 91.8000
7.500 ... 229.500
(VB = 5V)
(VB = 2.5V)
(VB = 1V)
3.0600
6.1200
15.3000
(VB = 5V)
(VB = 2.5V)
(VB= 1V)
45.900
91.8000
229.500
(VB = 5V)
(VB = 2.5V)
(VB= 1V)
Factory setting
J-22
Nom.val. fc −1dB
Bessel low pass
Nom.val. fc −1dB
(Hz)
3000
1000
500
250
80
40
20
10
5
(Hz)
900
400
200
100*)
40
20
10
5
2.5
1.25
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
High-pass
*)
Factory setting
Hz
Hz
Hz
−3dB Phase
del.
(Hz)
(ms)
3600 0.33
1165 0.66
588
0.9
291
1.45
99
3.65
49.5
6
25.5
11
12.4
20
6.2
42
Rise time
−3dB Phase
del.
(Hz) (Hz) (ms)
900
1550 0.47
445
805
0.7
235
410
1.1
117
210
1.8
38.5
68
4.3
22
37.5
7.4
10.5
19
12
5.1
9.6
22
2.6
4.8
50
1.35
2.4
100
0.7
1.2
200
0.17
0.3
650
0.08
0.15
1400
0.043 0.075 3000
Rise time
(Hz)
3100
1010
500
246
79
37.5
19
8.9
4.5
0.1
1.0
10
(ms)
0.13
0.35
0.64
1.3
3.8
7
13.3
26
50
(ms)
0.25
0.45
0.86
1.7
5.1
9.4
19
35.5
70
135
280
1100
2200
4600
Overshoot.
%
16
12
11
10
9
7
6
5
4
Overshoot
%
4.1
1.3
1.3
1.3
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
J-23
V
6V
dB
> 77 (0 ... 9600Hz)
V
1
Linearity variation
%
< 0.02, typically 0.01 2)
Strain gage
Noise
Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on the digital
Sensitivity
Zero point
with autocalibration off
Sensitivity
Zero point
µV/VPP
Inductive
< 2 (0...1500Hz)
< 1 (0... 100Hz)
< 0.2 (0... 1.25 Hz)
µV/V
< 100 (0...1500Hz)
< 50 (0..100Hz)
< 5 (0...1.25Hz)
< 0.2 / 0.4
< 20 / 60
Strain gage
Inductive
< 0.02
%
µV/V
0.2
%
µV/V
4
< 20
< 0.2
60
2)
mVPP
mV
<6
<3
For measuring ranges > 1mV/V SG (VB = 5V) or > 30mV/V inductive; otherwise < 0.2%
J-24
1.10
Accuracy class
0.01
Input signal
Frequency F1
Direction of rotation F2
Zero index
Transducer error (with AP01i only)
Transducers that can be connected
HBM torque transducers
with AP07/1
with AP17
Frequency signal sources with square wave or sinusoidal
voltage, incremental transducers
Inputlevel
0.1 .. 30 Vp (with control amplifier) or CMOS−level
0.1 .. 30 Vp (with control amplifier) or CMOS−level
CMOS−level
CMOS−level
T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1
T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2
kHz
0.0001 ... 1000
m
70
Input level
5V set-up
100mV set-up (automat. gain control)
VPP
VPP
5...30
0.1...30
Input impedance
kΩ
typ. 20
amplifier
Detection of the direction of rotation
via additional frequency signal (phase-shifted by 90°)
Ranges
Frequency measurement
Impulse counting
Maximum impulse counting when pulse counting
Zero point balance range
Ranges to 2kHz
Ranges to 20kHz
Ranges to 200kHz
Ranges to 1 MHz
Noise (10 kHz input signal)
Filter Off
1 kHz LP−Filter, Butterworth
100 Hz LP−Filter, Bessel
Input filter
Hz
Pulses
100...2000
1 000 ... 20 000
10 000... 200 000
100 000 ... 1 000 000
100 ... 1 000 000
Imp./s
1 000 000
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
−2000 ...+2000
−20 000... +20 000
−200 000 ... +200 000
−1 000 000 ... +1 000 000
Hz
Hz
Hz
3
1
0.2
disconnectable Glitch filter
J-25
Nom.val. fc −1dB
(Hz)
−
2000
1000
500
250
80
40
20
10
5
Without filter
Bessel low pass
2500
2000
1000
470
246
79
37.5
19
8.9
4.5
3100
2400
1200
570
291
99
49.5
25.5
12.4
6.2
Rise time
(ms)
0.4
0.5
0.8
0.9
1.45
3.65
6
11
20
42
Nom.val. fc −1dB
(Hz)
900
400
200
100*)
40
20
10
5
2.5
1.25
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
High-pass
−3dB Phase
del.
(Hz) (Hz) (ms)
−3dB Phase
del.
(Hz) (Hz) (ms)
900 1800
0.6
400
800
0.8
235
410
1.1
117
210
1.8
38.5
68
4.3
22
37.5
7.4
10.5
19
12
5.1
9.6
22
2.6
4.8
50
1.35
2.4
100
0.7
1.2
200
0.17
0.3
650
0.08
0.15
1400
0.043 0.075
3000
Hz
Hz
Hz
0.1
1.0
10
Absolute calibration accuracy
%
0.005
Long-term drift over 90d
%
<0.005
Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on the
%
0.005
mVPP
mV
<5
<3
0.12
0.18
0.35
0.70
1.3
3.8
7
13.3
26
50
Rise time
(ms)
0.35
0.52
0.86
1.7
5.1
9.4
19
35.5
70
135
280
1100
2200
4600
Over−
shoot
%
8
10
8
11
10
9
7
6
5
4
Over−
shoot
%
0
1.0
1.3
1.3
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Residual carrier voltage (38.4kHz)
*)
Factory setting
Specifications ➝ Connection boards
J-26
2
AP01i
Connection boards for one-channel amplifiers
AP 02
AP01i (connection board with D-female receptacle)
Width
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
D15 female receptacle, DA-15P 1)
Output-signal connection
D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2)
Option
2x EM001; 2x RM001 with AP02
Weight, approx.
kg
0.3
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
AP02 (connection board for 2 relay modules)
Width
37-pin D-Sub male connector, DC-37P 3)
Option
Weight, approx.
2x RM001
kg
0.3
AP03i
AP03i (connection board with MS-female device receptacle)
Width
mm
Option
Weight, approx.
1)
2)
3)
4)
HBM-order number 3-3312.0182
HBM-order number 1-MS3106 PEMV
40.6 (8 divs)
7-pin MS−female receptacle, MS3106A 16S-1P 4)
2x EM001, 2x RM001 with AP02
kg
0.3
AP07/1
J-27
AP07/1 for connection of T3..FNA and T10.. torque transducers
Width
mm
40.6 (8 divs)
Supply during measurement
Supply for calibration
Frequency
VPP
VPP
kHz
54
81
15 ... 20
7-pin MS−female receptacle, MS3106A 16S-1P 4)
Option
Weight, approx.
2)
4)
EM001; RM001
kg
0.5
HBM-order number 1-MS3106 PEMV
J-28
AP08
AP08 for piezoelectric transducers
Width
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
Connections
Transducer*)
Range capacitors Cg
Measuring ranges
Accuracy
Measuring range ≤ 100 pC
Measuring range≥ 100 pC
≤ 1000 pC/Cg=100 pF, 1 nF
10000 pC/Cg=10 nF
100000 pC/Cg=100 nF
Linearity deviation
BNC-female receptacle, isolated
D25 female receptacle
nF
pC
0.1
30...100
1
50...1000
10
500...10 000
100
5000...100 000
%
%
≤ 2.5
≤ 1
kHz
kHz
kHz
%
100 (−1dB)
15 (−1dB)
1.5 (−1dB)
0.25 full scale
Low pass filter
−
according to the data sheets of ML01B and ML10B
Option
−
1xEM001; 2xRM001 with AP02
−
s
s
−
10...10 000
0.1...100
m
m
100
200
pC
pC/s
< 1
0.1
%
%
°C [°F]
0.2 full scale
0.1 full scale
−20...+60 [−4...+140]
Low pass filter
−
according to the data sheets of ML01B and ML10B
Weight, approx.
kg
0.3
Time constant ( t = Cg ⋅ Rg)
Long
Medium (Rg=100GΩ)
Short (Rg=1GΩ)
Maximum cable length
Range capacitor Cg=100 pF
Range capacitor Cg ≥1 nF
Zero offset (during zero/measure
changeover)
Drift (at 20°C)
Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient
temperature
on the sensitivity
on the zero point
Operating temperature range
*)
Please note the advices on page B-55, if the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms.
AP09
AP11i
J-29
AP09 for connection of thermocouples
Width
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
Accuracy
with 25°C
with 20 ... 60°C
°C
°C
0.3
1
Terminal screws (0.5...1.5mm2)
Temperature cold junction
Reference-point measuring range
Semiconductor temperature-sensor at the
terminal screw
°C [°F]
Option
Weight, approx.
−20...+60 [−4...+140]
2x EM001; 2x RM001 with AP02
kg
0.3
AP11i (connection board with LemoR-female device receptacle)
Width
mm
Option
Weight, approx.
1)
2)
20.3 (4 divs)
6-pin LemoR FGG.1B.306 1)
2x EM001; 2xRM001 with AP02
kg
0.3
J-30
AP13i
AP13i for PLC I/O cards; all inputs and outputs are electrically isolated by optical couplers
Width
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
Outputs (short-circuit proof; protective circuit for inductive loads)
Values
Separate grounding systems
Nominal (rated) voltage (ext. supply)
Permitted voltage range
Output current
Short-circuit current
Permissible short-circuit period
Switching frequency on resistive load
V
V
A
A
Hz
Input/Output
5
2
24
6 ... 48
max. 0.5
0.8
unlimited
max. 500
D-female receptacle 15/25-pin
Option
1x EM001
Inputs
Values
Separate grounding systems
Input voltage for
Low level
High-level
Input current at 24V
Current consumption internal 5V
external 24V
Maximum power loss
Permissible short-circuit period
8
4
V
V
mA
mA
mA
W
<5
> 10
12
13
7.5 (without load)
10.5
unlimited
Permissible lead length
m
approx. 1000
Weight, approx.
kg
0.3
AP14
J-31
AP14 for Single SG
Width
Options
Accuracy class
Full bridge
Half bridge
Quarter bridge
mm
−
20.3 (4 divs)
1 EM001 output stage module, 2xRM001 with AP02
%
%
%
0.1
0.5
0.5
Connectable transducer
Half and full bridges, single strain gage
in 3-wire or 4-wire technology
to use with following amplifier plug-in
modules
Connections
Transducer
Analogue output, control signals
Internal completion resistors
ML10B, ML30B, ML55B
D15 female receptacle, DB25P
D25 female receptacle, DB25P
Ω
120, 350, 700
Max. permissible cable length between
transducer and connection board
m
500
Linearity deviation
%
0.05
kHz
0...50
Effect of 10K change
of ambient temperature
on zero point
on measurement sensitivity
Weight, approx.
%
%
Full bridge
Quarter bridge, half bridge
0.05
0.05
0.5
0.1
°C [°F]
−20...+60[−4...+140]
kg
0.3
J-32
AP17
AP17 for connecting torque flanges T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2 and frequency signals to ML60B
Width
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
D15 female receptacle, DA-15P 1)
Analogue output/remotes
°C [°F]
Option
Weight, approx.
−20 ...+ 60 [−4 ... +140]
1x EM001, 2x RM001 with AP02
kg
0.3
V (DC)
V (DC)
V (DC)
V (DC)
+16 (max. 500mA)3)
−16 (max. 500mA)3)
+5 (max. 300mA)3)
approx. 5 (max. 100mA)
VPP
VPP
10
5
VPP
V0P
V
kHz
0.3 / 14
3 / 20
−5 ...+ 4
1000 (with ML60B max. 200)
Outputs
Transducer supply
Release of calibration signal
Inputs
Nominal (rated) input voltage
symmetrical
asymmetrical
Minimum/maximum voltage swing
symmetrical
asymmetrical
Common-mode voltage range
Maximum input frequency
1)
2)
3)
HBM order number 3-3312.0182
HBM order number 2-9278.0293
The specified current values are the maximum permissible permanent currents for AP17. The number of con
nection boards per housing is not limited, however, a maximum of four connection boards can be used for the
transducer supply (5V/16V e.g. for T10F−SF1 torque flange).
AP18i
J-33
AP18i for current-fed piezoresistive transducers
Accuracy class
%
1
Width
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
Transducer excitation*)
mA
2.5...20 (adjustable); 4 (factory setting)
Current source dynamic impedance
kΩ
30 typ.
Input voltage range
V
12 9 (3...21V)
Load resistance
kΩ
>5
Input sensitivity
V
0.1; 1V; 10V ( 0.05 dB )
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
0.18...15 000
0.10...25 000
0.18...17 000
0.10...31 000
0.18...22 000
0.10...43 000
%
0.04 of full scale
µVms
µVms
µVms
30
30
75
dB
dB
−70 (typically)
−60 (typically)
Frequency response
Input sensitivity 0.1V
Input sensitivity 1V
for −1 dB
for −3 dB
for −1 dB
for −3 dB
for −1 dB
for −3 dB
Effect of 10K change
in ambient temperature
Noise referred to the input (2Hz...22.4kHz)
Input sensitivity 0.1V
Input sensitivity 10 V
Distortion
at 1kHz
at 8 kHz
Option
Weight, approx.
*)
Current output stage
kg
0.3
Please note the advices on page B-55, if the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms.
Specifications ➝ Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules
J-34
3
Multi-channel amplifier module ML455
ML455 + Connection board
AP455i/AP455iS6
Accuracy class
0.1
Accuracy
%
(0.1 of measured value+0.1 of full−scale value)
Carrier frequency
Hz
4801.20.48
Bridge excitation voltage (5%)
V
2.5
Connectable
transducers*)
in 6- (5) wire technique
Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board1)
Strain-gage half- or full bridge
Inductive half- or full bridge
LVDT
m
100
Measuring ranges
Strain-gage
mV/V
4
Inductive
mV/V
100
LVDT
mV/V
1000
W
120 ... 1000
mH
4 ... 330
Transducer impedance
Strain-gage half- or full bridge
Inductive half- or full bridge, LVDT
Noise at 25°C [77°F]
Butterworth/Bessel
1000 Hz/40 Hz
80 Hz/200 Hz
20 Hz/5 Hz
5 Hz/1.25 Hz
Linearity deviation
mV/V
mV/V
mV/V
mV/V
%
%
°C [°F]
AP455i
AP455iS6
Width
*)
1)
2)
3)
4)
LVDT
< 140
< 28
< 14
< 6
< 0.02
Autocal on
Autocal off
< 0.01
< 0.005
< 0.03
< 0.01
−20...+60 [−4 ... +140]
4x15-pin Sub-D
6-pin LemoR FGG.1B.3064)
mm
The transducer type can be selected separately for each of the four subchannels
Use cable twisted and shielded in pairs with outer shield (e.g. HBM-no. 4−3301.0071)
Of measured value
Of full−scale value
Inductive
< 30
< 3
< 1.5
< 0.5
%
Effect of a 10K−change of the ambient temperature
on sensitivity2)
on zero point3)
Strain-gage
< 3
< 0.5
< 0.2
< 0.1
20.3 (4 divs)
J-35
Multi−channel amplifier module ML455 and connection board AP455i
ML455
ML 455
AP455i
AP455iS6
AP455iS6
Subchannel 1
Subchannel 2
Subchannel 3
Subchannel 4
J-36
4
Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML460
ML460 + connection board
Accuracy class
Connectable transducers
HBM torque transducers2)
Frequency signal sources with square-wave or
sine-wave voltage, incremental transducers
Inductive rotation speed measuring devices (T-R coils)
using input filtering
Measuring ranges
Frequency measurement
Accuracy, related to full−scale value
Pulse counting
Maximum impulse rate when pulse counting
Precision
PWM carrier frequency
Precision
Pulse duration
Precision
Input frequency range
Mechanical
Operating voltages
Max. number of amplifier modules per 19” housing
with battery operation (NT011T)
Card format
Width
Connections
Designation of suitable male connector
(Manufacturer LemoR)
1)
2)
%
AP460i
0.011)
kHz
T4WA-S3, T3...FN/FNA, T10F...−KF1, T10F...−SF1, T10F...−
SU2
0.0001...500
kHz
0.5...200
kHz
%
0 ... 2
0... 20
0 ... 200
0 ... 500
0.01
Pulses
PPS
Kimp
100 ... 1 000 000
500 000
0.001
Hz
%
ms
ms
Hz
1 ... 10 000
0.05
0 ... 2500
0.001
0.25 ...10 000
_C
_C
_C
V
−20 ...+ 60
−20 ...+ 60
−25 ... +70
+5 (<240 mA)
+16 (<100 mA)
+8 (<10 mA)
−8 (<10 mA)
−
mm
mm
10
Europe 100 x 160
20.3 (4 divs)
LemoR 1B 10−pin EXG.1B.310.HLN
Fixed plug (1st letter in model desig.) : F
Key (3rd letter in model desig.) : G
Series: 1B
Type: 310
Example: FGG.1B.310.CLAD62
(Bold characters must be selected)
0.05 in the case of PWM
These torque transducers are not supplied via the connection plate AP460i
J-37
Channel properties
Number of subchannels
4
Class accuracy
0.01
Signals per subchannel
F1
F2
Zero index
Electrical separation of all inputs from one another and
from MGC ground
Input frequency range
Frequency, pulse or PWM signal
±90° phase shift relative to F1 (direction detection)
For detection of zero position in pulse counting
V
Typically 500V
kHz
0...500
J-38
Input signals
Direct inputs, difference signals
Input voltage range
VPP
0.4 ... 30
VPP
0.4 ... 30
V
ms
5...30
3
Direct inputs, bipolar
Input voltage range
Direct inputs, unipolar
Input voltage range
Minimum pulse width
Input for inductive transducer, filtered (F1 signals only)
Required minimum input voltage (peak-to-peak)
500 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
25 kH
50 kHz
75 kHz
100 kHz
125 kHz
150 kHz
175 kHz
200 kHz
Maximum input voltage
Input resistance F1 signal
50 mV
100 mV
750 mV
1V
1.5V
2V
2.5V
3V
4V
5V
7V
V
30
kΩ
approx. 6
Transducer excitation
Maximum current per module
5V
8V
16V
16 modules/device
10mA
62.5mA
62.5mA
1 module/device
160mA
1A
1A
J-39
Nom. val. fc –1dB
(Hz)
Without filter
Low−Pass with Butterworth–Characteristic
Low−Pass with Bessel–Characteristic
–3dB Phase del. Rise time
(Hz)
(Hz)
−
740
1750
1
<0.6
0
500
250
80
40
20
10
5
450
250
83
41
20
9
5
550
290
99
49.5
25.5
12.4
6.5
1.5
2.5
5
7.5
12
25
46
1
2.1
6.2
13
24
50
100
9.4
12
8.5
7.8
7
4.7
4.7
Nom. val. fc –1dB
(Hz)
400
200
100*)
40
20
10
5
2.5
1.25
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
(Hz)
380
235
125
43
24
11
4
2.6
1.35
0.7
0.17
0.08
0.04
(ms)
(ms)
Over
shoot
%
–3dB Phase del. Rise time
(Hz)
650
380
210
70
40
18
10
4.8
2.4
1.2
0.3
0.15
0.075
(ms)
1.4
1.5
2.6
5.2
7.4
15.7
27
53
104
195
730
1480
3000
(ms)
1
1.75
3
7.5
15
31
55
125
210
450
2000
3700
7500
Over
shoot
%
1
1
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
J-40
ML460 multi-channel amplifier module and AP460i connection board
ML460
ML460
ERROR
O
V
E
RL
O
A
D
AP460i
AP460i
CHAN
1
2
Subchannel 1
3
4
1
S
I
GN
A
L
2
3
Subchannel 2
4
Subchannel 3
Subchannel 4
5
J-41
Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML801B
AP8011)
ML801B + connection board
Accuracy class
AP8092)
Width
Thermocouples
Type K, J, T, E,
N, S, B, R
mm
Maximum sampling rate per channel
0.05
4
8
Thermocouples
Type K, J, T, E,
N, S, B, R, Individual inputs
electrically isolated
Pt100
4−wire circuit
20.3 (4divs)
values/s
2400
kHz
0 ... 1
Effective resolution
Bit
Max. permissible input voltage and common-mode voltage
V
Absolute calibration deviation
%
with cold junction
2)
3)
4)
0.2
8
10V
symmetrical
Transducers
1)
AP8354)
0.05
Number of measuring points
Filter
AP4093)
K
20
50
10
50
−
0.05
−
0.5
−
Nom. val fc
fg max
−1dB
−3dB
(Hz)
1000
500
250
200
80
1000
500
250
200
80
250
200
80
40
20
10
5
(Hz)
1189
523
253
203
78
1206
613
255
203
78
312
226
82
41
21
10
5.3
(Hz)
1518
691
322
265
103
1516
816
327
264
102
413
300
109
54
27
13
7
Internal
sampling rate
9600
9600
9600
9600
9600
4800
4800
4800
4800
4800
2400
2400
2400
1200
600
300
150
Connection plug on customer side: e. g. Phoenix Contact MC1.5/3-ST-3.5; Art. No. 1840379
(Connection plug for AP801S6: LemoR FFA0B.304 CLAD52)
No line break recognition
Two AP409 can be operated with one ML801B
Connection plug on customer side: LemoR FFA.0S.304.CLA
J-42
AP801
Low pass Bessel
AP409
Nom. val fc
fg max
−1dB
−3dB
(Hz)
200
100
40
20
10
5
2.5
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
(Hz)
259
102
41
20
10
5
2.5
1
0.5
0.21
0.1
0.051
(Hz)
448
184
75
36
18
9
4.5
1.8
0.9
0.38
0.19
0.094
Nom. val fc
fg max
−1dB
−3dB
(Hz)
1000
500
250
200
80
40
20
10
5
(Hz)
1076
596
279
214
78.9
38.7
19.5
9.36
4.37
(Hz)
1282
798
345
266
103
51.8
27.2
13.2
6.4
Low pass Butterworth compatible
AP809
AP835
Internal
sampling rate
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
1200
600
300
150
75
37.5
18.7
Internal
sampling rate
4800
4800
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
1200
J-43
AP801
AP809
AP409
Nom. val fc
fg max
−1dB
−3dB
(Hz)
200
100
40
20
10
5
2.5
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
(Hz)
322
125
41
21
11
5.5
2.7
1.36
0.68
0.186
0.093
0.047
(Hz)
571
216
70
37
19
9.6
4.8
2.4
1.2
0.186
0.158
0.079
Low pass Bessel compatible
AP835
Internal
sampling rate
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
1200
600
300
75
37.5
18.7
Input for voltage measurement
Input range
Zero offset
V
mV
−10.5...+10.5
V
mV
−10.5...+10.5
−
−80...+80
−80...+80
−80...+80
−80...+80
−
Internal resistance of the voltage source
kΩ
Input resistance symmetric/asymmetric
kΩ
500/250
2000/1000
1000
mVSS
< 50
< 0.5
<2
−
mV
0.8/1.5
0.01/0.02
0.02/0.05
−
%
<0.03;
typ. 0.01
<0.03;
typ. 0.01
<0.06;
typ. 0.03
−
V
mA
8/16
50
−
−
−
−
−
−
Noise voltage rel. to input at 1.25 Hz filter
Long−term drift over 48 hours with/without autocalibration
Linearity deviation
Transducer excitation5) (only AP801S6)
Supply voltage for transducers (can only be selected collectively for all channels)
Max. output current for external transducers
< 1.0
−
5) A total of max. 2 A for transducers supply may be withdrawn from the MGC
J-44
AP801
AP809
AP409
AP835
°C
−
< 0.06
< 0.25 (K, J, T, E, N)
−
°C
−
< 0.6 (S, B, R)
−
NiCr−Ni (K)
°C
−
−158...+1414
−191...+1414
−
Fe−CuNi (J)
°C
−
−167...+1192
−190...+1192
−
Cu−CuNi (T)
°C
−
−210...+393
−237...+393
−
NiCr−CuNi (E)
°C
−
−161...+1005
−205...+1005
−
NiCrSi−NiSi (N)
°C
−
−186...+1300
−219...+1300
−
Pt10Rh−Pt (S)
°C
−
+181...+1755
−50...+1755
−
Pt30Rh−Pt6Rh (B)
°C
−
+570...+1814
+160...+1814
−
Pt13Rh−Pt (R)
°C
−
+178...+1769
−50...+1769
°C
−
Type K, J, T, E, N
K
−
0.2/0.4
0.5/1
−
Type S, B, R
K
−
1.0/2.0
2/3
−
Type K, J, T, E, N
K
−
< 0.1
< 0.1
−
Type S, B, R
K
−
< 0.3
< 0.3
−
Measuring range
Ω
−
−
−
500
Linearisation error
°C
−
−
−
< 0.02
Input for thermocouples
Linearisation error
Linearisation range
Temperature range of cold junction
−20...+60
−
−
Long−term drift over 48 h with/without autocalibration
Noise with 1.25Hz filter
Input for Pt100
Linearisation range
Noise voltage with 1.25Hz filter
Measuring current
°C
−
−
−
−200 ... +848
mΩpp
−
−
−
2
mA
−
−
−
0.5
Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier
m
−
−
−
3006)
Linearity deviation
K
−
−
−
0.1
mΩ
−
−
−
< 30
Long−term drift over 48h with autocalibration
6) 100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS module
J-45
ML801B + Connection board
AP401
Accuracy class
%
0.1
Measuring range
V
10
Max. common mode input voltage (to housing/ground)
V
45
V
70
MW
20
Max. differential input voltage
Input impedance
(with 50 Hz, 20 VPP)
(with DC 10 V)
typ. 75
min. 100
Hz
1000 (−1 dB)
Linearity deviation
%
0.03
%
%
max. 0.02
max. 0.05
%
%
max. 0.02
max. 0.05
ESD resistance channel to housing/ground
V (DC)
400
ESD resistance channel to channel
V (DC)
400
on zero point (related to full scale)
Autocal on
Autocal off
on sensitivity
Autocal on
Autocal off
4−pole female connector, compatible to LemoR Serie S, Size 0,
contact arragement 304,
fitting connector: e.g. FFA 05 304 CLAC52 (LemoR)
Width
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
°C [°F]
−20...+60 [−4...+140]
J-46
Accuracy class
AP418i
%
Connectable transducers*)
1
4 current−fed piezoelectric transducer (e.g. Deltatront)
Transducer excitation
T-ID and TEDS compatible
mA
4
Input voltage range
V
2 ... 20
Measuring ranges
V
0.05; 0.5; 5
Hz
1000 (−1 dB)
Lower limit frequency (−3 dB)
Hz
0.72
Linearity deviation
%
0.05
VPP
VPP
VPP
5 Hz Bessel/500 Hz Butterworth
< 25 m/< 60 m
< 25 m/< 0.35 m
< 100 m/< 3.5 m
Noise
Filter characteristics
Measuring range 0.05 V
Measuring range 5 V
Measuring range 0.5 V und 5
V
0.1
0.03
on zero point (related to full scale)
Width
*)
%
mm
20.3 (4 TE)
°C [°F]
−20...+60 [−4...+140]
If the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms, please regard the advices on page B-55.
J-47
Accuracy class
AP810
%
0.1
8 S.G. half or full bridges
Excitation voltage (DC)
V
Transducer resistance at UB
Rmin (full bridge)
Rmax
Ω
Ω
10; 5; 2.5; 0.5
10V
330
5V
160
2.5V
120
0.5V
120
4000
Measuring ranges
mV/V
4 (VB=10V)
8 (VB=5V)
16 (VB=2.5V)
80 (VB=0.5V)
Control signal (Shunt)
mV/V
approx. 1 (with 350 Ω S.G. full bridge)
approx. 0.5 (with 350 Ω S.G. half bridge)
Noise at 350 W
Filter frequency
UB=10V
UB=5V
UB=2.5V
UB=0.5V
Hz
mm/m
mm/m
mm/m
mm/m
connection board
1.25/5
<0.025
<0.05
<0.1
<0.4
Bessel/Butterworth
40/80
<0.15
<0.3
<0.6
<3
m
200
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
Linearity deviation
%
0.05
Hz
500 (−1dB)
Effect of a 10K−change of the ambient temperature on
zero point (related to full scale)
on sensitivity
%
%
0.05
0.1
°C [°F]
−20...+60 [−4...+140]
Width
200/500
<1.8
<3.5
<7
−
J-48
Accuracy class
AP814Bi
0.1 7)
%
8 S.G. quarter bridges in three wire technique
Ω
120, 350, 700, 1000 8)
V
5; 2.5; 1; 0.5
Measuring ranges
mV/V
8 (UB=5V)
16 (UB=2.5V)
40 (UB=1V)
80 (UB=0.5V)
Control signal (shunt)
mV/V
approx. 1 (at 350 Ω)
Noise at 350 W
Filter frequency
UB=5V
UB=2.5V
UB=1V
UB=0.5V
Hz
mm/m
mm/m
mm/m
mm/m
connection board
Width
1.25/5
<0.05
<0.1
<0.25
<0.45
Bessel/Butterworth
40/80
<0.3
<0.65
<1.5
<3.5
D25 female receptable
m
2009)10)
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
Linearity variation
%
0.05
Hz
500 (−1dB)
Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature
on the zero point (related to the full−scale value)
on sensitivity
%
0.1
0.1
%
7)
°C
The error influence caused by asymmetrical cable resistances, is not included in the accuracy class.
8) Option
9) Use connection cable with wire cross section 0.25 mm2!
10) 100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS modul
−20...+60
200/500
<2.5
<6.5
<13
−
J-49
Accuracy class
AP815i
8 S.G. full bridges in six wire technique or
8 S.G. half bridges in six wire technique or
8 S.G. half bridges in five wire technique or
8 S.G. quarter bridges in four wire technique or
2 S.G. rosettes
Ω
120, 350, 700, (optional 1000)
V
5; 2.5; 1; 0.5
Measuring ranges
mV/V
8 (VB=5V)
16 (VB=2.5V)
40 (VB=1V)
80 (VB=0.5V)
Control signal (Shunt)
mV/V
1.0078 0.1% (at 350Ω)
Noise at 350 W
Filter frequency
VB=5V
VB=2.5V
VB=1V
VB=0.5V
Hz
mm/m
mm/m
mm/m
mm/m
connection board
Width
11)
12)
13)
0.111)12)
%
1.25/5
<0.1
<0.2
<0.5
<1
Bessel/Butterworth
40/80
<0.6
<1.2
<3
<6
200/500
<4
<8
<20
<40
2 D25 female receptacle
m
20013)
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
Linearity deviation
%
0.05
Hz
500 (−1dB)
Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on
on sensitivity
%
%
0.112)
0.1
°C
−20...+60
0.2 with irradiation according to EN 6100−4−3:1996 + A1:1998
0.2 with 5 V−excitation
100 m max. distance between connection board and T−ID/TEDS modul
J-50
Accuracy class
AP836
%
0.1
8 potentiometric Transducers
V
5
Transducer resistance
Rmin
Rmax
Ω
Ω
190
5000
Measuring range
Noise
Filter frequency
mV/V
500
Hz
mV/V
Bessel/Butterworth
40/80
<0.05
connection board
Width
1.25/5
<0.01
m
200 (100 m max. distance between connection board and
T−ID/TEDS modul)
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
Linearity deviation
%
0.05
Hz
500 (−1dB)
Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on
on sensitivity
%
%
0.05
0.1
°C
−20...+60
200/500
<0.5
J-51
Multi−channel amplifier connection boards
AP801
for 8 DC voltage sources
AP801S6
AP809
for 8 voltage sources
for 8 thermocouples
with voltage supply 8V/16V
AP801S6
AP409
AP835
AP836
for 4 thermocouples
for 8 RTD Pt100
for 8 potentiometric
Transducers
1
13
1
13
14
25
14
25
J-52
Multi−channel amplifier connection boards
AP810
AP814Bi
AP815i
for 8 S.G. half or full bridges
for 8 S.G. quarter bridges
in three wire technique
for 8 S.G. quarter, halfor full bridges
1
13
1
13
14
25
1
13
14
25
13
1
14
25
13
AP401
AP418i
for 4 DC−voltage supplies
(electrically isolated)
for 4 current−fed piezoelectric transducers
(compatible with T-ID and TEDS)
1
14
25
14
25
6
J-53
Programmable plug−in module ML70B
Analogue outputs
Max. number of analog outputs
2 (10 with AP78)
Analogue outputs update rate
Hz
2400
V
10V asymmetrical
kΩ
>5
Ω
<5
mVPP
< 12
mV
<3
Effect of ambient temperature at 10_K:
Sensitivity
Zero point
%
mV
< 0.08 typically 0.04
< 3 typically 2
Internal resistance
Programming
Programming language
IEC61131−3
Data program memory (volatile)
kByte
224
Data program memory (non-volatile)
kByte
16
Code program memory (volatile)
(2 x available for online change)
kByte
2 x 160
Code program memory (non-volatile)
kByte
160
Memory for project sources (non-volatile)
kByte
192
Hz
2400, synchronized with MGCplus measured-value processing
Call frequency of the IEC program
Number of subchannels
Effective computer output
1...128 (set by user)
75,000 float operations/s
or 300,000 integer operations/s
J-54
Mechanical
_C [°F]
−20 ...+ 60 [−4 ...+140]
_C [°F]
−20 ...+ 60 [−4 ...+140]
_C [°F]
−25 ... +70 [−13 ...+158]
V
+14.6 ... +17.0 (<90 mA)
−14.6 ... –17.0 (<100 mA)
−7 ... −9 (<10 mA)
Card format
mm
Europe 100 x 160
Width
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
Operating voltages
Connector
DIN 41612 indirectly
Supported connection boards
Number of controllable connection boards
0, 1 or 2
Supported connection board types
AP71 (2 CAN interfaces)
AP72 (2 serial interfaces)
AP75 (8 Digital-In, 8 Digital-Out, 24V level)
AP78 (8 analog outputs)
AP72 Connection board
Interfaces
Baudrate
Electrical isolation
kBaud
V
Connector
9.6; 19.2; 38.4; 57.6; 115.2
Typ. 500
9−pol.Sub−D female receptacle
Mechanics
_C
−20 ... +60
_C
−20 ... +60
_C
−25 ... +70
V
+5 ... (< 100 mA)
Nominal (rated) voltages
Card dimensions
mm
102 x 112
Width
mm
20.3 (4 division units)
J-55
ML70B Programmable module and AP72 Connection board
ML70B
AP72
J-56
7
Communication module ML71B/ML71BS6 with
AP71 Connection board (CANbus)
CAN interface
Number of CAN interfaces
2
Protocol
CAN 2.0B
Baud rate
Baud
Line length
m
10k
20k
50k
125k
250k
500k
1M
1000
1000
1000
500
250
100
25
Hardware bus link individually selectable for each CAN interface
Standard High Speed ISO 11898−24V
Fault Tolerant Low Speed
Connection technique
2x 9-pin DSUB, individual potential separation of supply and
ground
Measurement recording
max. 128 each CAN−port1)
Signals per second
Number of recordable signals
Max. number of signals (16-bit-signals with 4 signals per message
Database with parameter information on the CAN signals
Size of databases
50
100
400
1200
128
72
36
8 2)
1 ... 83)
2 (one database per CAN interface)
2x 100k
Database storage
Mechanical values
_C [°F]
−20 ... +60 [−4 ...+140]
Operating voltage
_C [°F]
_C [°F]
V
−20 ... +60 [−4 ...+140]
−25 ... +70 [−13 ...+158]
+14.6 ... +17.0 (< 90 mA)
−14.6 ... –17.0 (< 100 mA)
−7 ... −9 (< 10 mA)
mm
mm
Europe 100 x 160
20.3 (4 divs)
Card format
Width
Receptacle
1)
2)
3)
Byte
25
Maximum 256 channels per CP42
For operation with more than 8 subchannels
For 8−channel operation
non-volatile in ML71B flash memory
J-57
Type
ML71B/ML71BS6
Analogue output
The analogue output can display one of the max. 128 input
signals at a time
V
10V asymmetrical
kΩ
>5
Internal resistance
Ω
<5
Non−linearity
%
< 0.05
%
< 0.08 typ. 0.04
sensitivity
Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on zero
point
mV
3 typ. 2
J-58
8
Communication module ML74 with AP74
connection board (CANHEAD)1)
CANinterface
Connection board
Protocol
Baud rate
Line length
AP74
CAN 2.0B
kBaud
m
250
250
Hardware bus link individually selectable for each CAN
interface
Maximum bus length (without branches) 2)
No. of CANHEAD
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Measurement recording
Max. number of CANHEAD modules
Number of sub−channels
CANHEAD power supply
Cut off current
Cut−off upon current to earth
Mechanical values
Card format
Width
1)
2)
3)
120 Ohm; 2.5 V
P=1.8W/CANHEAD
m
90
100
110
120
135
155
180
220
250
140
155
170
190
215
250
12
10 ... 120 3)
A
2
A
0.1
_C
−20 ... +60
_C
_C
mm
mm
−20 ... +60
−25 ... +70
Only with CP22 or CP42 (not with CP32B). The housing must be of type B or C.
Thin Media Cable (0.38 mm2) at ambient temperature of 45 °C
Max. 256 channels each CP42
ISO 11898
350 Ohm; 2.5 V
P=1.15W/CANHEAD
Europa 100 x 160
20.3 (4 TE)
700 Ohm; 2.5 V
1000 Ohm; 2.5 V
P=1.0W/CANHEAD
165
180
200
220
250
9
J-59
Communication module ML77B with AP77
Connection board (Profibus DP)1)
Protocol
Baud rate
Profibus DP slave as per DIN 19245−3
Baud
Profibus ID number
Potential separation
9.6k ... 12M
04A9 (hexadecimal)
V
typ. 500
9−pin DSUB
Measurement transmission
Supported formats
Transmission rate at Profibus
Float; 24 signals
Float; 48 signals
Integer 32 bit; 32 signals
4 Byte Integer
2 Byte Integer
4 Byte Float (IEEE)
4 Byte Float (Siemens)
4 Byte raw values
2 Byte raw values
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
2400
1200
2400
2400
1200
800
_C [°F]
−20 ... +60 [−4...+140]
Service temperature range
_C [°F]
−20 ... +60 [−4...+140]
_C [°F]
−25 ... +70 [−13...+158]
Operating voltages
V
+14.6 ... +17.0 (< 200 mA)
−14.6 ... –17.0 (< 200 mA)
+7 ... +9 (<10 mA)
Card format (Euro)
mm
100 x 160
Width
mm
20.3 (4 divs)
Mechanical values
Connector
Weight
1)
kg
approx. 0.3
Only in systems with CP42 or in systems without a communications processor.
J-60
10
Multi-channel I/O amplifier module ML78B
AP78
AP75
10 (2 filterable outputs, 1 of which
is also accessible via the front
panel on the ML78B)
2 (both outputs filterable
1 also accessible via the front panel on the
ML78B)
Analogue outputs
Max. number of analogue outputs
V
Analogue outputs update rate
Hz
D/A conversion resolution
bit
V
−
2400
16
22)
Grounding systems
Typically 2001)
1, isolated from dig. grounding systems
10 asymmetrical
kΩ
≥5
Internal resistance
Ω
<5
mVPP
< 12
mV
<3
Effect of change in ambient temperature of
10K
%
mV
< 0.08; typically 0.04
< 3, typically 2
Digital inputs
8 (16)3)
Max. number of digital inputs
Input voltage range
V
0 ... 30 (nom. 0 ... 24V)
V
Typically 500
Low potential
V
<5
High potential
V
Grounding systems
Control functions for MGCplus channel groups
1)
2)
3)
>10
1, isolated from the digital output
Autocalibration on/off; Reset; Tare; Peak
value clear/hold; Synchronisation of internal curve generator
The filterable digital outputs are not electrically isolated!
1 grounding system for 2 digital filterable analogue outputs and 1 grounding system for the remaining 8 analogue outputs
When using 2 AP75 connection boards: 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs
J-61
Digital outputs
8 (16)4)
Max. number of digital outputs
Output voltage range
V
0 ... 30 (nom. 0 ... 24V)
Output current
A
0.5
Short-circuit current
A
1.5
V
Typically 500
ms
<4
Response time
Grounding systems
Excitation
1, isolated from the digital inputs
V
18 ... 30 (nom. 24); external
•
Possible function assignment for the outputs
•
•
•
Combine Limit Value for up to
120 MGCplus channels
Acknowledgement signal for input
Settings by means of an external
software command
Overflow message for groups of
measurement channels
Curve generator
Max. number of curves
Update rate (each channel adjustable)
10
Hz
1; 2; 5; 10; 20; 50; 100; 200; 600; 1200; 2400
≤ 128000, permanently storable in flash memory
Max. number of curve points
Mechanical
°C [°F]
°C [°F]
−20 ...+ 60 [−4 ... +140]
°C [°F]
−25 ...+ 70 [−13 ... +158]
Operating voltages
V
+14.6 ... +17.0 (< 100 mA)/ −17.0 ... −14.6 (< 90 mA)/ −9.0 ... −7.0 (< 10 mA)
Card format / width
mm
Permissible connection board configurations
4)
5)
−20 ...+ 60 [−4 ... +140]
Euro 160 x 100 / 20.3 (4divs)
25−pin Sub−D
Plug-in screw terminals
1 x AP78 / 1 x AP75 / 1 x AP78 and 1 x AP75 / 2 x AP755)
When using 2 AP75 connection boards: 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs
Analogue outputs VO1 and VO2 are both available on both connection boards
J-62
Connection boards for ML78B
AP75
AP78
J-63
Specifications Ý System devices
11
System devices
System devices MGCplus*)
Mains supply
Supply voltage
Max. input nominal (rated) current
Start-up current
V AC
A
A
115V/230V −25+15%
2.2/1.3
<20
Battery supply
Battery voltage
Max. input nominal (rated) current
Start-up current
V DC
A
A
12V/24V −25+15%
11.5/5.5
<30
Max. power consumption
W
°C [°F]
Type of protection
150
1...16 slots, desktop housing
−10 ... +55 [14 ... 131]
19” rack frame
−10 ... +55 [14 ... 131]
desktop housing IP20
19” rack frame IP20
*) MGCplus − COMPLIANCE OF STANDARDS: The MGCplus system is tested according to the harmonized European standards EN61326
and EN61010 Therefore it achieves the protection aims of EEC directive 89/336EEC in the field of electromagnetic compatibility and EEC directive 73/23/EEC in the field of electrical safety of low voltage equipment. Mechanical stress is tested according to European Standard
EN60068−2−6 for vibrations and EN60068−2−27 for shock. The equipment is exposed to an acceleration of 25 m/s2 within the frequency range
of 5...65 Hz in all 3 axes. Duration of this vibration test: 30min per axis. The shock test is performed with a rated value of 200 m/s2 acceleration
during 11 ms, half sine pulse shape, with 3 shocks in each of the 6 possible directions.
System devices MGCsplit
Power supply 1−NT650
Input voltage (nominal/rated)
V
12, 24 and 42, on−board network (9 V to 58 V)
Ride−through during start−up
V
3 (0.1 s); 6 ... 9 (10 s)
Output voltage
V
28 10 %
Output current (continuous load)
A
> 3.5
Protection against operating errors
−
Protection against sustained short−circuit and false polarity
Permissible relative humidity
%
100 (with dew point transition)
Degree of protection
−
IP65
Connections
−
Voltage supply: ODU Minisnap, Series B, Type S3, Size 2, 4 pole, 60° encoded, (matching
connector e. g. S32BFC-T04LPH0-6000)
CAN and On/Off control signal: ODU Minisnap, Series B, Type S3, Size 2, 6 pole, 30° encoded, (matching connector e. g. S32BAC-T06MPH0-6000)
Split-Line: ODU Minisnap, Series B, Type S3, Size 2, 16 pole, 0° encoded,
(matching connector e. g. S32B0C-T16PFG0-7500)
Start−up from standby mode
−
CAN, digital control line
Status exchange with CPxx
−
I2C (load currents, errors)
Control elements
Contactor (push button)
J-64
System devices MGCsplit (continued)
Modules *)
1−SH400
Function
Degree of protection
*)
1−SH650
Enclosure for one MLxx amplifier and max. two connection
boards (each 4 divs wide)
°C [°F]
Nominal (rated) temperature
range
°C [°F]
Permissible relative humidity
%
Supply voltage
V
Connections
−
1−SH400CP
Enclosure for the communication processor
IP40
IP65
IP40
−30 ... +70 [−22 ... +158]
−30 ... +70 [−22 ... +158]
−20 ... +60 [−4 ... +140]
−20 ... +60 [−4 ... +140]
95 at 40 °C [104 °F]
100
S Split−Line Input/Output
S As on the resp. connection
boards
S Split−Line Input/Output
S ODU connectors (LemoR
compatible)
95 at 40 °C [104 °F]
18 ...32
Weight without amplifier and
connection board, approx.
kg
1.6
Dimensions (W x H x D)
mm
104 x 146 x 205
S Connection for ABX22A
S With CP22 and CP42:
100 Mbit-Ethernet; USB;
RS-232-C
See MGCplus system specifications for measurement properties of amplifier modules.
Split-Line
Total length
m
25 (from 1−SH400CP through last module)
Max. number of measurement
modules
−
16
Meas./s
307,200; 4−byte format (like MGCplus)
−
Connected automatically
Baud rate
Bus termination
J-65
CP42 Communication processor
Width
mm
Interfaces
RS-232-C
USB1) (master/slave)
Ethernet
Data transfer rate
Ethernet (128 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz)
USB (32 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz)
PC card harddisk
approx. 109 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz
128 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz
Measured
values/s
Measured
values/s
Measured
values/s
Measured
values/s
60.9 (12 divs)
Connection
technique
Baud rate
typ. 500V
9-pin D−sub
female connector
115.2 kBaud
No
USB female
connector
12 MBaud (fastmode)
typ. 500V
RJ45
100 MBaud
307 200 (4−byte format)
76 800 (4−byte format)
262144 (4−byte format)
307200 (2−byte format)
°C [°F]
−10 ... +55 [+14 ... +131]
°C [°F]
−10 ... +55 [+14 ... +131]
°C [°F]
−25 ... +70[−13 ... +158]
kg
approx. 0.6
Weight
Extension (optional)
PC card harddisk, up to 5 GByte, ATA standard
I/O contacts
V DC
Connection technique 2 x In, 2 x Out, 24 V, GND
Screw terminals (line less than 30 meters long)
Input voltage level LOW
V
0 ... 5
Input voltage range HIGH
V
10 ... 24
Input current, typically, high level = 24 V
mA
12
mA
Output level active high at 0 A
3
Level supply minus 0.7 V
Output level active high at 0.5 A
Level supply minus 3 V
Power supply (external)
V
24 (11 V ... 30 V)
Output current, max.
A
0.5
Short-circuit current, typically
A
Short-circuit period
1)
500
0.8
unlimited
Cable length 5 m; Cable extensions are not permissible.
J-66
CP22 Communication processor
Width
Interfaces
mm
40.6 (8 divs)
Baud rate
RS-232-C
No
9-pin D−sub female connector
38.4 kBaud
USB2) (master/slave)
No
USB female connector
12 MBaud (fast
mode)
Ethernet
Yes
RJ45
10/100 MBaud
Data transfer rate
Ethernet (64 channels/4−byte measured values/sampling
rate 2400 Hz)
Measured
values/s
153 600
Measured
values/s
57 600
°C [°F]
−20 ... +65 [−4 ... +149]
°C [°F]
−20 ... +65 [−4 ... +149]
°C [°F]
−25 ... +70 [−13 ... +158]
kg
approx. 0.6
USB (24 channels/4−byte measured values/sampling
rate 2400 Hz)
Weight
I/O contacts
V DC
Connection technique 1 x In, 1 x Out, 24 V, GND
Input voltage level LOW
Input voltage range HIGH
V
0 ... 5
V
10 ... 24
mA
12
mA
3
Output level active high at 0 A
Level supply minus 0.7 V
Output level active high at 0.5 A
Level supply minus 3 V
Power supply (external)
V
24 (11 V ... 30 V)
Output current, max.
A
0.5
Short-circuit current, typically
A
0.8
Short-circuit period
2)
500
Screw terminals (line less than 30 meters long)
Cable length 5 m; Cable extensions are not permissible.
unlimited
J-67
RM001 Relay module
Input voltage
V
0/5
Resistance
kΩ
12
Response time
ms
maximum 5
Release time
ms
maximum 25
V
A
VA
42
1
30
V
+8; −8
Relay breaking capacity
max. voltage
max current
max. power
Operating voltage
Power consumption
mA
34
Switching
cycles
Switching
cycles
50 x 106
100 x 103
kg
0.1
Input voltage
V
−10 ... +10
Input resistance
kΩ
12.5
Relay-module life
mechanical
electrical (at nominal (rated) load)
Weight, approx
EM001 Output stage module
Input
Output
Impressed voltage
V
Impressed current
mA
20 / 4 ... 20
Ω
maximum 500
Load resistance
−10 ... +10
minimum 0
kHz
10
V
+16; −16
Power consumption
mA
35
Weight, approx
kg
0.1
Operating voltage
J-68
Mobile display and control unit ABX22A
Illuminated display
No
Front width
mm
Current consumption (8V)
mA
20
m
1.5
Length of cable (6-wire)
Connector type
111.8 (22 divs)
Linkage connector, in accordance with DIN 45326, Series 723, 8-pin,
No.09-0171-15-08
Display and control panel AB22A/AB32
Display
AB22A
Backlit LCD display, resolution 192x64 pixels
AB32
Vacuum-fluorescent display (VFD), resolution 192x64 pixels
Key panel
Keypad (alphanumeric), 4 function keys, cursor keys and 5 dialogue keys. All keys
are touch-sensitive with real keys beneath.
Password
There is a facility for protecting certain operating levels with
a password.
Dialogue
Menu languages: German/English/French
Display formats
Weight, approx
1, 3, 6 values; ty graph, xy graph; Status limit switch
kg
0.5
K-1
K
Index
K-2
K-3
Index
A
B
AB22A, control elements, D-3
battery connection, desktop housing, B-4
AB22A/AB32
display, measuring mode, D-6
first display, D-5
menus, D-13
save set−up, D-17
selection menus, D-18
set−up mode, D-11
battery operation, B-4
AB32, control elements, D-4
absolute/relativ to base, G-8
ABX22A, J-68
connecting, B-8
blank plate, B-8
bridge resistance, B-49
button, D-19 , D-22 , I-4
C
calling up menus, D-13
CANHEAD, connecting, B-96
channel names, G-27
activation fields, D-19 , I-4
channel number, D-9
adaptation to the transducer
current and voltage measurement, E-52–E-55
inductive transducer, E-31
piezoelectric transducer, E-66–E-69
piezoresistive transducer, E-78–E-81
potentiometric transducer, E-83–E-86
resistance temperature detector, E-55–E-57
resistors, E-58–E-61
rotation speed, E-45–E-49
SG transducer, E-20
thermocouples, E-49–E-51
channel selection in measuring mode, D-15
channel selection in set−up mode, D-16
Combine limit switches, F-12
commissioning, C-3
Communication module ML71B/ML71BS6, J-56
Communication module ML74, J-58
Communication module ML77, J-59
Communications processor CP22/CP42, insert, A-17
amplifier
first measurement, E-18
setting up, E-4
compensating resistor, B-19 , E-21 , E-29
angle of rotation measurement, B-38
computer, connecting, B-99
AP74 connection board, B-98
conditioning, E-13
auto start, H-30
conditions on site, A-35
Completion resistor, B-20
autocal, F-24
K-4
Conformity, L-1
Index
D
connecting, A-1 , B-1 , C-1 , D-1 , E-1 , F-1 , G-1 ,
H-1 , J-1
data acquisition, D-7 , G-3 , G-22
Connecting separate TEDS modules, B-13
data acquisition comment, G-22 , H-25–H-29
Connecting transducer, LVDT, B-17
data acquisition parameter, H-15 , H-17 , H-23 , H-24
, H-25 , H-26 , H-30 , H-31 , I-8
connecting transducers, B-12
DC power source, B-48
DC voltage sources, B-44
frequency generator, B-51 , B-52
impulse transducer, B-53
inductive full bridge, B-14 , B-15 , B-18 , E-6
inductive half bridge, B-16
piezoelectric transducers, B-55
piezoresistive transducers, B-56
potentiometric transducers, B-57
resistors, Pt10,100, 1000, B-49
SG full bridge, B-14 , B-15 , B-18 , E-6
SG half bridge, B-16
shunt resistor, B-100
single strain gage, B-19–B-21
thermocouples, B-42
torque flange, T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2, B-26
torque measurement shaft, T4WA−S3, B-38
torque transducer
T1A, T4A/WA−S3, T5, TB1A, B-37
T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1, B-33
data acquisition parameter set, H-30
data acquisition program, H-17 , H-19
data storage, D-17
DC power source, connecting, B-48
DC voltage source, connecting, B-44
define trigger, H-18
device structure, A-15
dialogue boxes, D-19
direct input, D-15
display
channel names, G-27
display format, G-3
F−keys, G-23
display format, G-3
distributor board VT810/815i, connect, B-60
Connection board, AP460i, Pin assignment, B-28
Distributor board VT814i, connecting, B-59
connection board
AP02, B-111
AP07/1, B-113
AP74, B-98
AP77, B-119
documentation, A-8
connection boards, J-26
AP01i... AP18i, connecting, B-105
connector pin assignment, AP17, B-109
current value, F-20
Rotation speed measurement, T10FS−SF1,
T10FS−SU2 (symmetrical signals), B-31
E
earthing switch, B-3 , B-4 , B-5
edit field, D-19 , D-21 , I-4
envelope curve, F-21
K-5
Index
error messages, D-10
Greenline, B-11
Evaluate F2 signal, E-64
guidelines, A-9
Extended functions, E-64
H
external trigger, H-21
External triggering, B-108
F
F−keys, G-23
housing, MGCplus desktop housing, A-13
hysteresis, F-8
I
factory settings, of remotes, AP01i...AP14, B-108
impulse counting, B-53
feedback circuits, B-37
impulse transducer, connecting, B-53
file name, G-22 , H-24
inductive full bridge, connecting, B-14
filter
high pass, E-15
low pass, E-15
inductive half bridge, connecting, B-16
final stage module, B-115
AP01i and AP03i, B-120
AP07/1, B-121
AP08/14/17/18i, B-122
AP09 and AP11i, B-124
AP13i, B-116
format, H-25–H-29
four−wire connection, B-12 , B-21 , B-37 , B-49
frequency generator, connecting, B-51 , B-52
frequency measurement, without direction of rotation
signal, B-51 , B-52
input, letters and numbers, D-21
Inputs and outputs, CP22/CP42, B-101 , B-104
integration, F-4 , F-18
L
language, H-38
desktop device, C-6
level, H-22
limit switch
delay time, F-9
setting up, F-8
Frequency quadrupling, E-64
limit switches, F-7 , F-11
setting up, F-6
fuse, B-4 , B-5
LVDT, connecting, B-17
G
M
Glitch filter, E-44 , E-48 , E-64
mains connection, desktop housing, B-3
graphic display, G-17
maintenance and cleaning, A-36
K-6
Measurement, Torque transducer, E-37
measurement band, H-20
measurement of, impulses/frequencies, E-61–E-64
Index
AP17, B-88
AP401, B-78
AP409, B-77
AP460i, B-80
AP815i, B-79
measurement with, piezoresistive transducers,
E-75–E-78
ML38B, Extended functions, E-7
measuring rate trigger, H-17 , H-18
ML74 communication module, B-97
measuring with, inductive transducer, E-31–E-35
mode, H-19 , H-22
menu, pull−up menu, D-13
menu structure, I-1 , I-3
Multi−channel amplifier connection boards, J-51 ,
J-52
menus, exiting, D-14
Multi−channel amplifier module ML455, J-34
MGC Compact, C-5
Multi−channel amplifier plug−in module ML460, J-36
MGCsplit
CAN bus connection, AP71, B-89
Connecting, B-62 , B-75
Connecting to MGCplus systems, A-27
Enclosure dimensions, A-32
Enclosure versions, A-20
Inputs/outputs
AP13i, B-81 , B-82 , B-83
AP17, B-85 , B-86 , B-87
AP75, B-93 , B-94 , B-95
AP78, B-90 , B-91 , B-92
ML/AP module, B-76
LED display, A-24
ADDRESS, A-26
ERROR, A-24
LINK, A-24
Rx/Tx, A-24
SYNC, A-24
Measurement module IP40, A-21
Measurement module IP65, A-22
Power supply units NT650/NT651, B-63
Processor module, A-23
AP13i, B-84
Multi−channel amplifier plug−in module ML70B, J-53
Multi−channel amplifier plug−in module ML801B,
J-41
Multi−channel I/O module ML78, J-60
multi−channel module, D-9
multiplier, B-115
N
number, G-6
O
one−channel amplifier plug−in modules, general
data, J-3
one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML01B, J-5
K-7
Index
one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML38, J-15
potentiometric transducer, connecting, B-57
potentiometric transducers, E-83
connecting, B-58
one−channel amplifier plug-in module ML55BS6,
J-21
Pre trigger, H-23
printer, connecting, B-99
one−channel module, D-9
P
print, H-37
R
recording measurement series, H-14
parameter set, F-24
reduction factor, H-26
password, H-3
relay contacts, AP01i...AP14, B-111
peak value, F-19
relay module, B-111
peak value stores, F-15
combine, F-16
controlling, F-18
switch off, F-15 , F-22
remote, F-3
periods, G-22 , H-15
piezoelectric transducer, connecting, B-55
piezoelectric transducers, E-66
piezoresistive transducer, E-75
piezoresistive transducers, E-78
connecting, B-56
pin assignment
AP01i...AP14, B-107
AP01i/03i/08/09/11i/14/17/18i, B-106
AP02, B-111
AP07/1, B-113
AP13i, B-116 , B-119
PLC, connecting, B-99
remote contacts, F-3 , F-4
AP13i, B-118
remotes, B-101
assignment AP01i...AP14, B-108
factory setting, B-108
function, F-3
resistors, E-58
PT10, 100, 1000, connecting, B-49
RM001, B-111
rotation speed and angle of rotation measurement,
T4WA−S3, B-38
rotation speed measurement
T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2 (symmetrical signals), B-29
T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1 (asymmetrical signals),
B-35
Polynomial curve, cubic, E-7
K-8
Index
Rotation speed measurement with inductive transducers, B-41
S
safety instructions, A-3
remaining dangers, A-3
save, H-9
security prompt, D-17
selection field, D-19 , I-4
selection fields, D-20
selection levels, D-18
serial interfaces, B-99
set−up window, D-19
stop condition, H-24
stop trigger, H-17
switch, F-24
synchronization, CP22, B-6
system
language, H-38
password, H-3
print, H-37
save, H-9
time, H-39
system description, A-10
system devices, J-63
T
setting up, basic parameters, E-3
TEDS, Connection, B-13
setup menu, G-4
TEDS transducer, E-9
SG
full bridge, connecting, B-14 , B-15 , B-18 , E-6
half bridge, connecting, B-16
single strain gauge, connecting, B-19
transducer, connecting, B-12
thermocouples, E-49
connecting, B-42
shielding design, B-11
time stamp, H-16
shunt resistor, connecting, B-100
torque flange T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2, B-26
single strain gauge, connecting, B-19–B-21
torque measurement
T10F−SF1, T10F−SU2, B-26
T1A, T4A/WA−S3, T5, TB1A (slip ring or direct
cable connection), B-37
T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1 (square−wave excitation
voltage), B-33
slot number, D-9
start condition, H-23
start trigger, H-17
status data acquisition, G-22
status limit switch, G-21
Status line, D-8
status line, G-7
three−wire connection, B-49
time, H-39
Torque transducer, E-37
torque transducers (T1A, T4A/WA−S3, T5, TB1A),
connecting, B-37
K-9
Index
torque transducers (T3...FN/FNA, T10F−KF1), B-33
transducer connection
distributor board VT814i, B-59
potentiometric transducers, B-58 , B-60
Transducer error input active, E-64
trigger, external, H-21
trigger condition, H-17 , H-22
trigger function, H-17
trigger level, H-22
type, G-6
V
version, F-23
voltage drop, B-5
Y
YT−Diagram, G-17
Z
Zero index input active, E-64
K-10
Index
xxx
Modifications reserved.
All details describe our products in
general form only. They are not to be understood as express
warranty and do not constitute any liability whatsoever.
B0534-18.0 en
Hottinger Baldwin Messtechnik GmbH
Postfach 10 01 51, D-64201 Darmstadt
Im Tiefen See 45, D-64293 Darmstadt
Tel.: +49/61 51/8 03-0; Fax: +49/61 51/ 8039100
E−mail: [email protected] www.hbm.com

MGCplus AB22A/AB32

Transcription

Similar documents

Session SG75 Manual

Neve 1073 Service Information - technicalaudio.com

Multichannel Waveform Generator

SV9532 Manual EN PDF

Review Ameritron ALS-500 HF Solid State Amplifier

- Audison

New to Neat Repeatz? Get Started in 2 Easy Steps!

Log on to www.onlinesbi.com

A 100 Watt Audio Amplifier Employing The LM3876

TDA2040 - Micropik